JP6680324B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine is configured to control the gaming machine by a main control means and a sub control means. For example, while the main control of the game is performed by the main control unit, the sub-control unit controls the display of the effect image on the image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device provided in the gaming machine.

  In recent years, in order to further enhance the enjoyment of the game, there is a tendency that a variety of effect images are displayed on the image display means.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the processing may be complicated and enormous as the effect images are diversified.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily diversifying display modes of effect images and the like displayed on image display means. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, a main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub-control means that operates based on a command transmitted from the main control means, and its sub-control. Image display means for displaying an image based on control by the means, wherein the sub-control means draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means, and the image. A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the drawing means, and a predetermined display for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. First display specifying means for specifying a mode from a plurality of display modes, and first standard information storage for storing first standard information defining, for each screen, drawing information showing information necessary for drawing in each display mode. means , A first specifying unit that specifies the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying unit, an updating unit that is updated every a predetermined time elapses, and the updating unit is updated. Drawing instruction information that generates drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the updated drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means. The image drawing means includes a generating means and a measuring means capable of measuring time, and the image drawing means uses the image information to generate an image for one screen based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. What is drawn, the display mode to dynamically display the identification information on the image display means, for each display mode, the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display is predetermined, Said vice Control means, when the required time from the start of the display in a specific and predetermined display mode by the first display specifying means has elapsed, subsequently to display a first prescribed for use in dynamic continuous display of the identification information When the command transmitted from the main control unit is the predetermined command, the sub-control unit that has received the predetermined command includes the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command. Dynamic display is executed in a specific display mode, there are a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command, and the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means is a display mode of any required time. Even if there is , the display mode of the dynamic continuous display of the identification information , which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed, is the same display mode in which the identification information repeats a predetermined movement. If the sub-control unit receives a predetermined command from the main control unit during the dynamic continuation display period of the identification information, the sub-control unit moves the identification information that was executed before the dynamic continuation display of the identification information. Dynamic display for starting the dynamic display of the identification information based on the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means with respect to the received predetermined command, without performing the fixed display of the dynamic display. Display control means is provided.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub control means that operates based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image based on the control by the sub control means And an image display unit for displaying an image, wherein the sub-control unit draws an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display unit, and an image drawing unit for drawing the image. A first image storage means for storing a plurality of image information to be used, and a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means. First display specifying means for specifying from inside, first specifying information storing means for storing first specifying information specifying drawing information indicating information necessary for drawing in each display mode for each screen, and the first display Identification means First specifying means for specifying the first specified information corresponding to the more specified predetermined display mode, updating means for updating every predetermined time, and updating for each updating of the updating means. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updating means, and timing the time. The image drawing means draws an image for one screen by using the image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means. In the display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display means, the time required from the start to the end of the dynamic display is predetermined for each display mode, and the sub-control means is First display If the the required time from the start of the display in a specific and predetermined display mode has elapsed by the constant means it continues to display, second specifying means for specifying a first prescribed information used for dynamic continuous display of the identification information When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means receiving the predetermined command displays a dynamic display of the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command as a specific display. If there is a plurality of times corresponding to the predetermined command, and the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means is a display mode of any required time, the required time is when the elapsed, still appear, dynamic continuous display of the display mode of the identification information is the same display mode in which the identification information is repeated a predetermined motion, the sub-control means, When the predetermined command is received from the main control means during the dynamic continuous display period of the identification information, the fixed display of the dynamic display of the identification information executed before the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is performed. However, since the image display means is provided with the dynamic display control means for starting the dynamic display of the identification information based on the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means with respect to the received predetermined command, There is an effect that a variety of display modes displayed on the display means can be easily achieved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reserve sphere storage area, a reserve sphere execution area, a 1st prefetch execution area, and a 2nd prefetch execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table, (b) was the figure which showed the variation pattern table for big hits typically, (c) is the outside (normal). It is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table typically, and (d) is the figure which showed the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the data contained in the prefetch command. It is the figure which showed the structure of the prefetch information storage area typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a change. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a pending ball count command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a fixed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. FIG. 4C is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a continuous notice command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing frame button operation command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a reserved image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a frame button operation process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reserve ball storage area, and a reserve ball execution area. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 45. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. To support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. To be done.

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting start prize), which will be described later, are performed according to the theme given to each stage. Is designed. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “town stage” → “empty stage” is performed. ”→“ Island stage ”→“ City stage ”→ ... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach effect is started, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of the super reach during normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not it is in the course of being accompanied by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), or a stop pattern after the end of the variation. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the starting winning is shown by a lighting state, and among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, the fluctuation of the unexecuted ball (holding ball) The number of reserved balls, which is the number, is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for entering the first entrance 64, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined (jackpot lottery), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot, the jackpot type Is also determined. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 2R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

  Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after a 15 round jackpot, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 2 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, the “15R regular jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds, and then a low probability state is entered, and a shortened state is maintained for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

  Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. Is the state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, the "low-probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not changing and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability. Also, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving time) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the first entrance port. It refers to a game state in which a ball easily enters 64. In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened or once. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed depending on the hit.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a liquid crystal display that performs variable display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning) as a trigger. (The following is simply abbreviated as "display device") 3rd symbol display device 81, and the 2nd symbol composed of the LED that variably displays the 2nd symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the second entrance 67. And a display device 83. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs that imitate characters such as planers, furoshiki, and helmets. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the end. When transitioning to a high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display in which main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the “low-probability symbol”) to which an even number is added are arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with a periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small region Ds1 is a region for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small region Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved spheres is 1, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times is reserved. The number may be set to the number below or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol) are alternately turned on every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (a symbol "○" in the present embodiment), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (open). Is configured). The number of times the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed on the second symbol reserve lamp 84. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times as in the case of the first ball entrance 64, and is not more than 3 times or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for the jackpot is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed and the big hit is stopped, and at the same time. The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is achieved. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is being opened. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material. If the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) that stores various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. A stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance 64. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number to be a jackpot is set by a jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table. When it matches the value of the random number (hit value), it is determined as a big hit. This jackpot random number table is divided into two types, one for low probability (period during which the probability is not changing) and one for high probability (during probability changing) with a higher probability of being a jackpot than that for low probability, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a big hit is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between low probability and high probability.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In the first random number counter C1, the number of random number values (hit values) that are a big hit at low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the low probability big hit random number table. . On the other hand, the number of random number values (hit values) that are a big hit at a high probability is 30, and the values are “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390. , 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the high probability big hit random number table.

  In the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the low probability big hit random number table and the winning value stored in the high probability big hit random number table are set so that the winning values are not duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a winning value regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the jackpot may be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) to obtain a maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), It is stored in any one of the holding first to fourth holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the one reserved area in the reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of range, a variation pattern in the variation effect Alternatively, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is a big hit random number, the change pattern and the stop type in the change effect are those at the time of a big hit. . In this case, the variation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table. As shown in FIG. 7A, the jackpot type table is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum round number shifts to a high-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, "15R probability variation jackpot", and the maximum round number shifts to a low-probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots. In addition to "15R regular jackpot" which is in a time-saving state during the number of fluctuations, "2R certainty variation jackpot" in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpot, 15R certainty variation jackpot which is one of 15R certainty variation jackpot There is a big hit. The 15R certainty variation premier jackpot is a jackpot in which an effect suggesting that the 15R certainty variation jackpot will be a 15R certainty variation jackpot is performed with almost 100% probability.

  In the jackpot type table, the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value "0 to 38" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R certainty variation jackpot, and the value "39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R certainty variation jackpot. Is associated, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “40 to 79” for the 15R normal jackpot, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99” for the 2R probability variable jackpot. It is associated.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "39", the big hit type is " If "15R probability variation premium jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", "15R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90". If there is, "2R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type table is defined such that the probability variation state is selected with a probability of about 60% in the case of a jackpot, and the 15R probability variation premium jackpot is selected with a probability of 1%. ing. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the 15R certainty variation premium jackpot are distinguished, but the count value of the first hit type counter C2 is 0 to 39 and the 15R certainty variation jackpot is defined as the 15R certainty variation jackpot. When is selected, the 15R certainty variation premium jackpot may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to the values of other counters.

  Returning to FIG. 6, description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and back" (for example in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), the RAM 203 stores the value. It is stored in any of the holding areas among the holding first to fourth areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b.

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random number values for which stop types are selected. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a large table is selected such that the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select "Completely missed". In this table, the "rearward / rearward reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front / rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear / rear outreach" or "reach other than front / rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, a table is selected in which the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely missed" is 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. This makes it difficult to select “Completely out”. In this table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front / backward" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-backward" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-position reach" is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine a fluctuation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines a variation pattern such as so-called normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. by the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation mode is determined.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the fluctuation pattern tables, a big hit fluctuation pattern table used at the time of a big hit and a deviation fluctuation pattern table used at the time of deviation. Also, as the deviation pattern table for deviation, the fluctuation pattern table for deviation (probability change) depending on whether the game state is a high probability state at the time saving state or the probability changing time, or a low probability state at the normal time excluding the time saving state. Also, a variation pattern table for deviation (normal) is prepared.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the jackpot variation pattern table is referred to when the 15R probability jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot are determined as the jackpot type. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the types of premium jackpots that are referred to, and 2R certainty variation jackpots that are referred to when the 2R certainty variation jackpot is determined, and jackpot types. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit (hit value), the holding area is held according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area. The variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is determined from the jackpot variation pattern.

  Common to 15R jackpot, there are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Correlation with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 10 for various types of normal reach, 11 to 99 for various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. It is 100-198. Nole reach various is a reach that has a short variation time, and a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called, the symbols are aligned when the bitter stops), and various types of super reach are , A variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the reach of a longer variation time than the normal reach (for example, a reach that develops from the long reach or the normal reach) is a variation pattern of special reach, and a variation longer than that of the super reach. The first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the reach of time (for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach or a special reach where the development destination from the normal reach is different from the super reach) is a variation pattern. The table common to the 5R jackpot is a jackpot, so it is easy to select various special reach types in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, it is also necessary to configure various normal reach types and super reach types. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game playability that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  It should be noted that "reach various" means that there are many things with different effect contents in each reach, and for example, in the super reach, a reach in which the rear image is quickly changed and displayed, or a certain character is displayed. There is a reach that is displayed suddenly, and in addition to that, a plurality of reach with different effect contents are included, such as one in which a notice effect before the start of variation is added, and one in which an effect that makes a big hit by re-variation is added.

  Premier reach A to C are provided only for the premium jackpot, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 99 for the premier reach A, 100 to 149 for the premier reach B, and 150 for the premier reach C. It is ~ 198. In addition, the premier reach A is, for example, a reach effect that suggests the occurrence of a big hit, and when an effect that displays "chicks" that raises the expectation for a big hit during normal times is performed, instead of "chicks", " For example, the premier reach B is an effect for displaying a "girl" that does not normally appear, and the premier reach C is for a notification lamp (not shown) that is not normally turned on. It is a one-shot announcement production that lights up.

  2R fluctuations A to C are provided exclusively for 2R certainty variation jackpots, and 2R variation A is 0 to 99, 2R variation B is 100 to 149, and 2R variation C is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is 150-198. Note that the 2R variation A is, for example, an effect in which the final first symbol (or the third symbol) is stopped at a specific symbol with “chicken”, and the 2R variation B does not normally appear. The final 1st design (or the 3rd design) with a "girl" is an effect that stops at a specific design, and 2R variation C is the final 1st with the lighting of the one-notification lamp described above. The design (or the third design) is an effect that stops at a specific design.

  Note that the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for announcing the start of the jackpot or reach effect before or during the change effect may be determined by another change type counter, or when the reach is established, Other variation type counters may determine how many symbols the first symbol (or the third symbol) to be stopped is shifted to stop (for example, the front and rear deviated by one symbol).

  FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7C, the detachment (normal) variation pattern table is dedicated to complete detachment referred to when complete detachment is determined as the stop type at the time of detachment, and other than front / rear detachment and front / rear detachment. The common reach, which is referred to when the reach is determined, is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. Has been done. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is not a value (hit value) that is a big hit, that is, when it is a value that is out of range, when the gaming state is in a normal low probability state excluding a time saving state, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is It is determined from the deviation pattern (normal).

  The complete deviation only includes a short deviation in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time and the reach is not established, and a long deviation in which the reach is longer than the short deviation but the reach is not established. Correspondences are 0 to 148 for short deviations and 149 to 198 for long deviations. Also, in common to reach, various out-of-range normal reach types that reach are established but have short variation times, various out-reach types that have longer variation times than those of normal reach types, and out-of-range special types that have even longer variation times than various out-of-range super reach types. There are various types of reach, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0-148 for various normal reach types, 149-190 for various super reach types, and 191-198 for various special reach types.

  FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7D, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, like the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Only for complete detachment with detachment and long detachment, referred to when front and rear outreach and reach other than front and rear detachment are determined, common for reach with various outreach normal reach, various outreach super reach and various outreach special reach , And the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that does not result in a big hit, that is, a value that is out of range, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, it is stored in the same holding area. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined from the deviation (probability change) change pattern.

  Correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 exclusively for complete deviation is 0-190 for short deviation and 191-198 for long deviation. In addition, the correlation with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0-148 for various normal reach types, 149-190 for various super reach types, and 191-198 for various special reach types.

  The deviation (probability change) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the game state is a time-saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, so that a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. . Therefore, if there is too much out-of-range in the time saving state or the high probability state, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving the player a waiting state and giving the player discomfort. there is a possibility. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state of probability change, it is configured so that the short deviation is more easily selected than in other cases, and the next variation display is started early, so that the game is played. The possibility of giving discomfort to the person can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the operating rate from extremely decreasing.

  Although the variation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected by using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence or absence of advance notice display). Further, the selection of the deviation type is configured to be divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table and the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, but even if the game state is normal, a plurality of holding balls (for example, , If the maximum is four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, so that the selection may be made by referring to the outlying (probability change) variation pattern table, or the number of reserved balls. It may be configured to prepare a normal or probability variation pattern table corresponding to the above.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern table for each deviation shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D, the short deviation and the long deviation are simply regarded as the deviation, and when the deviation is selected, another table is referred to. Alternatively, the short deviation and the long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, each table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. Is obtained when The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-153", it is determined as a winning, and the symbol "○" as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is set once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). While being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a reserved sphere number counter 203a, a reserved sphere storage area 203b, a reserved sphere execution area 203c, a first prefetch execution area 203d, a second prefetch execution area 203e, a first prefetch processing flag 203f, and a second prefetch processing in progress. It has a flag 203g.

  The on-hold ball number counter 203a enters a ball into the first ball entrance 64 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) that is regularly executed every 4 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start prize"). It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 up to four times based on the above. The holding ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process (S613 in FIG. 23) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be held for variable display is increased, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S203 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variation effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 20).

  The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S204 in FIG. 19). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. As a result, the number of holding balls of the fluctuating effect managed by the holding ball number counter 223a provided in the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual holding ball of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls inside the voice lamp control device 113 based on the holding ball number command, and each time the number of holding balls managed therein changes, the display control device 114. A display hold sphere count command for notifying the hold sphere count is transmitted. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere count notified by the display reserved sphere count command.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b includes a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a change type counter CS1 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) upon detection of a start prize. This is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. (See FIG. 6).

  In addition, the reserved ball execution area 203c is data to be referred to in processing such as jackpot lottery and setting of the display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 (of counters C1 to C3 and CS1). This is a memory for storing each value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, it performs the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, etc. Among the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one starting prize is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c. The shift in this embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used in the jackpot lottery and the first hit type symbol counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type. A stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining a variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol when it is dislocated and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining a variation pattern for stopping the stop symbol when the jackpot is used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize).

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) stores a first per random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first per random number counter C1 and a first per-type random number counter C2 for storing the value of each per-type counter C2. A per-type classification counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although it is provided in 203b, a plurality of holding ball storage areas may be provided and four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the holding ball storage areas.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) the first ball entrance 64, up to a maximum of four times. In this case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). . That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the starting prize that is older in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data that corresponds to the starting prize that is earliest in time.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved sphere execution area 203c, like the reserved sphere storage area 203b, a first random number counter storage area 203c1, a first per type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and a variation type counter storage. Area 203c4 is provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the MPU 201 sets the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203b to the holding ball. The areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c are respectively shifted. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 21), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, a variation effect is performed under the control of the main control device 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is performed based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 transfers the random value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved first area to the first random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value of the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. The random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203c is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into areas (areas 1 to 3) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, in the reserved sphere storage area 203b, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved).

  Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start of the variation effect is determined is "4" and the data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. To do. In this state, the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data in the other areas (second to fourth) respectively. Shift to the area with the smallest number by 1 (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the number of holding balls counter 203a at the time when the change effect start determination is made is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data of the holding second area to the holding first area. , The data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

  It should be noted that each data of the holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area having a smaller area number by 1, regardless of the presence or absence of the data. In that case, it is unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding areas (second to fourth), so that the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The first look-ahead execution area 203d and the second look-ahead execution area 203e are the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when the start winning is detected. This is a memory for storing the respective values of C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 separately from the reserved sphere storage area 203b for use in the "look-ahead" process.

  “Prefetching” means that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set in advance before the jackpot lottery and the change pattern are determined based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the execution start timing of the change effect. It is to read. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to pre-read each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 by the "pre-reading" process, and predict the result of the jackpot lottery and the determination result of the variation pattern in advance, and the pre-reading process makes the prediction. Based on the jackpot lottery result and the determination result of the variation pattern, various controls such as the setting of the continuous announcement effect and the destruction determination of the command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are executed.

  Specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer when the winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is detected are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e (S206 to FIG. 19). S213). At this time, if the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are in the prefetch process (including waiting for start of the prefetch process; the same applies hereinafter) are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the first prefetch execution area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in 203d. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing are not stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. If so, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  On the other hand, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during prefetch processing are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Then, the storage process is ended without storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. In this case, the prefetching process is not executed.

  Whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during pre-reading in the first pre-reading execution area 203d and the second pre-reading execution area 203e are stored is determined by the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing. This is performed by referring to the in-process flag 203g. The first pre-reading processing flag 203f indicates whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the pre-reading processing are stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d, and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g. This is a flag indicating whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. When both the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g are turned on, the counter C1 that is pre-reading processing (including waiting for start of pre-reading processing) in the corresponding pre-reading execution areas 203d and 203e To C3, CS1 values are stored, and when OFF, it indicates that the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1 during prefetch processing in the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are not stored.

  The first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g are set to OFF as initial values in the RAM initialization processing (S613 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f is set to ON, and the prefetch processing is in progress in the first prefetch execution area 203d (waiting). ) Counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S207 in FIG. 19). When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g is set to ON, and the prefetch processing is being performed in the second prefetch execution area 203e (standby). ) Counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored (see S210 in FIG. 19).

  When the first pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to ON, the pre-reading processing (see FIGS. 24 and 25) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing causes the pre-reading in the ON state. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the processing flags 203f and 203g are prefetched to predict the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern determination result.

  Then, a pre-read command to be described later is generated from the predicted jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern determination result, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command, and thereby executes the control for setting the execution of the continuous announcement effect for all the pending variable effects. In addition, the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c at the time of starting the variation effect, By comparing the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like.

  Here, the continuous announcement effect will be described. The continuous notice effect is a type of notice effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit as a result of the change effect (preliminary notice), and all of the pending effects when the start winning corresponding to the change effect is detected. The same or related symbols are the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over the variable effects. For example, except for the variable effect that is newly held with the start winning, over all the variable effects that were held at the time of the starting winning, immediately after the stop display of the variable effect, the “foam” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display the image. As a result, even if the jackpot pattern does not appear as a stop symbol for the variation effect and the jackpot does not occur, the player can continuously view the "bubble" images immediately after the variation stop over a plurality of variation displays. Thus, it is possible to give the player the expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the continuous announcement production, and it is possible to give the player motivation to continue the game.

  In addition, "Egg" is displayed during the first change effect, "Hick" is displayed during the second change effect including the change effect that is held with the start winning, and during the third change effect. "Chick" is displayed and the "chicken group" is displayed during the 4th variation effect (variation effect held with the start winning) (however, the number of holding balls at the time of the continuous notice effect is set. In the case of 3 or less, by displaying the "chicken group" in the last fluctuating effect in which the continuous notice effect is set, that is, in the fluctuating effect held with the starting winning), the third symbol display device 81 At each time the variation effect is performed, the symbol displayed by the continuous notice effect gradually changes (steps up), so that the player sees this gradually changing symbol Chicken group When displayed, you can have expectations to be a big hit at its flocks displayed variation effect.

  In addition, when the variation effect for which the continuous announcement effect is set is 3, the continuous announcement effect is performed in the order of “egg” → “chick” → “chicken group”, and the variation effect for which the continuous announcement effect is set is 2. In some cases, the continuous announcement effect is performed in the order of “egg” → “chicken group”, and when the variation effect for which the continuous announcement effect is set is 1, the “chicken group” is suddenly displayed. In this way, when the number of variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set is 3 or less, the symbols in the middle are skipped and the chicken group is displayed suddenly, so that the player can suddenly display the chicken group that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that is a big hit in the variation effect in which the chicken group is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the main controller 110, based on each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning, the prefetching process is executed prior to the timing when the execution of the variation effect is started, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern are selected. Predict the judgment result. Then, these prediction results are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of variation effects that have been suspended from the later-described prefetch suspension number included in the prefetch command, and then the jackpot lottery and variation notified by the prefetch command. Based on the prediction result of the pattern determination, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is performed for the pending variable effect. Then, in the case of performing the continuous announcement effect, the mode of the continuous announcement effect is determined. As a result, the processing in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the lottery processing in which the game state to be transitioned based on the start winning is drawn. If the MPU 221 having high processing capability is used, it is possible to set various aspects of the continuous notice effect, execution conditions, and the like.

  It should be noted that details of the setting of the continuous announcement effect by the voice lamp control device 113 and the above-described command destruction determination processing will be described later.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination, and the prefetch command is set, the first prefetch in-progress flag 203f is set. It is set to OFF, which indicates that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are not stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. Similarly, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are prefetched and the results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination are predicted, and the prefetch command is set, the second prefetch processing is being performed. The flag 203g is set to OFF, which indicates that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process are not stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. As a result, when the start winning is detected, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set to the reserved ball storage areas with respect to the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e corresponding to the prefetch processing in progress flags 203f and 203g set to OFF. It will be stored in 203b.

  In this way, it is determined whether or not the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the pre-reading process are stored in the corresponding pre-reading execution areas by the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g. If the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process are stored, it is possible to overwrite the corresponding prefetching execution area with the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the start winning timing. Suppress. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the MPU 201 prefetches until the prefetch processing is completed, even if there is a start winning. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution areas 203d and 203e continue to be held. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the prefetching process by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Here, the details of the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e will be described with reference to FIG. 6 again. The first look-ahead execution area 203d includes a first random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the first per random number counter C1, a first per type classification counter storage area 203d2 for storing the value of the first per type counter C2, A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. In addition, the second prefetch execution area 203e includes a first winning random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of the first winning type counter C2. And a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Further, in the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e, the same values as the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in these execution areas are reserved in the reserved sphere storage area 203b. Pre-reading reserved number storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided for storing the pre-reading pending number that is kept as the pre-reading pending number.

  When the MPU 201 detects a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64, the MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the reserved ball storage area 203b, and at that time, the first prefetching flag 203f. Is off, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203b are also stored in the respective counter storage areas 203d1 to d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time (the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after adding 1 in association with the start winning) is stored in the prefetch reserved number storage area 203d5 as the prefetch reserved number, and further, The prefetching flag 203f is set to ON.

  If the first pre-reading processing flag 203f is turned on at the time when the start winning is detected and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is turned off, the MPU 201 holds the reserved ball storage area 203b along with the start winning detection. The respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the above are also stored in the respective counter storage areas 203e1 to e4 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time (the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after adding 1 in association with the start winning) is stored in the prefetch reserved number storage area 203e5 as the prefetch reserved number, and further, the second The prefetch processing flag 203g is set to ON.

  As described above, when the first pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to ON, the pre-reading processing (see FIGS. 24 and 25) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main processing is performed. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the pre-reading execution areas corresponding to the pre-reading flags 203f and 203g in which the ON state is detected are pre-read to predict the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination results. . Then, based on the predicted result of the jackpot determination and the result of the variation pattern, a pre-reading command including information on the pre-reading reserved number stored in the pre-reading reserved number storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set pre-reading command is set to the voice lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The details of the prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, at the start of the variation effect, the pre-reading is performed by pre-reading the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the start winning detected after the start winning corresponding to the variation effect. It was performing processing. Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the variation effect and executing the jackpot lottery, and a start winning detection to obtain the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a prefetch process are executed. It is also conceivable to configure it to include processing and.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected are temporarily stored in either the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the prefetch processing is executed in the main processing. In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is one of the timer interruption processing executed prior to the main processing, which is one of the variation start processing (see FIG. 21). Run in

  When the pachinko machine is configured to pre-read each counter value acquired and held at the time of winning the start and predict the result of the big hit lottery separately from the big hit lottery that is performed when the execution of the variable effect is started. In the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the starting prize with each hit value one by one, and also in the pre-reading process, separately from the jackpot lottery, the read-ahead value and each hit It is necessary to compare the values one by one. As a result, particularly when the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the comparison process of the counter value and each hit value is performed in both the big hit lottery and the pre-reading process, for example, when the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value with the winning value in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  In such a situation, as in the conventional gaming machine, at the time of starting the variation effect, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the starting prize detected after the starting prize corresponding to the variation effect. If the pre-reading process is performed using, the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect will be performed before and after, and the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the pre-reading at the time of starting winning will be predicted, which is the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected due to delays in the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

  Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the variation effect and executing the jackpot lottery, and a start winning detection to obtain the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a prefetch process are executed. When configured to include processing, there may be a case where the jackpot lottery processing and the pre-reading processing are both performed in one timer interrupt processing based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . Since each process may take a long processing time as described above, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, while the prefetching process is executed in the main process, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is controlled by the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21) which is one of the processes. As a result, even if the prefetching process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt process is executed during the prefetch process, the prefetch process can be surely completed because it is continuously executed after the timer interrupt process is completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed by using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the jackpot lottery or the like is predicted. At the same time, the jackpot lottery can be carried out without delay at the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e as well as the reserved ball number storage area 203b. The pre-reading process is executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e.

  Here, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere number storage area 203b are directly read out to perform the prefetching process, when the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the prefetching process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) of the holding ball storage area 203b are shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c or another holding area. As a result, it is necessary to change the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetching process every time the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pre-reading process is executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e, the fluctuation occurs during the pre-reading process. Even when the effect execution start timing comes and the variation start process is executed, the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the pre-reading process. Since it is sufficient to continue to refer to, the processing can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch flag 203f or until the prefetch processing is completed. By setting the second pre-reading processing flag 203g to ON, even if a new start winning is detected during execution of the pre-reading processing, the counter acquired with the new start winning is acquired. Depending on the values of C1 to C3 and CS1, it is possible to prevent the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e in the prefetch process from being overwritten. Therefore, the prefetch process can be surely executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first prefetching process flag 203f and the second prefetching process flag 203g are on, and the first prefetching execution area 203d and the second prefetching execution area 203e. If all are in the pre-reading process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in association with the start winning are set to the first pre-reading execution area 203d and the second pre-reading execution area. It is configured not to be stored in 203e either. As a result, the pre-reading process is not performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning, but the pre-reading process is, as described above, the setting of the continuous notice effect and the voice lamp control device. This is for performing the process of determining the destruction of the command transmitted to 113, and since it does not directly affect the game, there is no problem.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two pre-reading execution areas, that is, a first pre-reading execution area 203d and a second pre-reading execution area 203e are prepared, and one of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of winning the start prize. Is configured to store. Therefore, when a new start winning is detected while the prefetch process is being executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the second prefetch execution area is detected. If 203e is not in the pre-reading process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the new start winning are stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e, and stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e. The prefetching process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a group in which the prefetch processing is not executed among the groups of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 which are acquired by the start winning and are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the number of groups can be increased as much as possible. On the other hand, the prefetching process can be executed.

  Although two prefetch execution areas are prepared in the present embodiment, one prefetch execution area may be provided. In this case, among the sets of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, the set in which the prefetch processing is not executed is compared with the case where two preread execution areas are prepared. Although many occurrences occur, the increase in the storage capacity required for the RAM 203 can be suppressed by using one prefetch execution area.

  Further, three or more (predetermined number of holding balls that can be held) prefetch execution areas may be prepared. For example, when three of the first to third pre-reading execution areas are prepared as pre-reading execution areas, the first pre-reading execution area stores the counter value of the pre-reading processing execution, and the second pre-reading execution area is executing the pre-reading processing execution. If the counter value of No. is not stored, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning is stored in the second prefetch execution area, and the prefetch processing is being performed in the first prefetch execution area and the second prefetch execution area. If the counter value is stored and the counter value during pre-reading processing is not stored in the third pre-reading execution area, each counter value newly acquired by the start winning is stored in the third pre-reading execution area. May be. Alternatively, the values of the counters acquired by the start winning may be stored in the order of the first prefetch execution area → the second prefetch execution area → the third prefetch execution area. By preparing three or more read-ahead execution areas, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a group in which the read-ahead processing is not executed, as compared with the case where two read-ahead execution areas are prepared, and the read-ahead processing is performed for a larger number of groups. Can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-read execution areas 203d and 203e are provided with pre-read reservation number storage areas 203d5 and 203e5, and the start winning is detected and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set to the pre-read execution areas 203d and 203e. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at the time of being stored in 203e (the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after adding 1 with the start winning) is stored in the prefetch reserved number storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 as the prefetch reserved number. . Here, the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect while the prefetch processing flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are on. Every time the fluctuation start processing is executed, the value is decremented by 1 (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 20).

  As a result, the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5, 203e5 is the same as the value of each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the corresponding execution area, but is reserved in the reserve sphere storage area 203b. It is an accurate representation of the number of pending calls. Therefore, when the prefetch command is generated based on the result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetch process and the determination result of the variation pattern, the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 should be included in the prefetch command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command can accurately grasp the number of times the variable effect is held according to the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch process.

  Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the continuous notice effect is set on the basis of the result of the prefetching process, the start winning award which is a trigger to acquire the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetching process is performed is set. It is possible to reliably set the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect for the previous or previous starting winning. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, by holding the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command for the number of times the variation effect is executed, by the number of prefetch suspensions indicated by the prefetch command, The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetch is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  Next, the details of the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the data included in the prefetch command. The data structure of the prefetch command will be described with the left side in FIG. 8A as the upper byte, the right side as the lower byte, the left side as the upper bit, and the right side as the lower bit.

  The pre-read command is a command that notifies the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern determination result predicted by the pre-read process from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the pre-reading pending count. This prefetch command is composed of 2 bytes as shown in FIG. 8A, and data indicating that it is a prefetch command is stored in the upper 1 byte as the command type. Further, the lower 1 byte stores data indicating the number of prefetches, the prediction result of the big hit lottery (big hit lottery prediction result), and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination (fluctuation pattern judgment prediction result). Specifically, among the 8 bits forming the lower 1 byte, the most significant 3 bits indicate the number of prefetch pending, and the lower 2 bits on the lower side subsequent to the most significant 3 bits indicate the jackpot determination prediction result. The fluctuation pattern determination prediction result is shown by the lower 3 bits.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b1), the prefetch hold count indicates that the prefetch hold count is 0 when 3 bits are stored, and the prefetch hold count is stored when “001” is stored. It indicates that the number of prefetches is one, and if "010" is stored, it indicates that the number of prefetching reservations is two, and if "011" is stored, that the number of prefetching reservations is three. If “100” is stored, it means that the number of prefetching reservations is four.

  As described above, the prefetching process predicts the jackpot lottery or the like based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 before the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, if the pre-reading pending number storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 become 0 during the pre-reading process, the jackpot lottery or the like at the start of the variation effect execution is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 during the pre-reading process. Means that. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prefetch command is not transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 if the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5, 203e5 are 0 or less. Therefore, in the prefetch command, "000" is not stored in the prefetch pending count. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 confirms the number of times of pre-reading of the pre-reading command, and if the value is “000”, it is confirmed that the data is destroyed due to the influence of noise or the like, and the pre-reading command is ignored or It may be configured to display an error or the like. Similarly, in the case of "101" and "111" as well, the data may have been destroyed due to the influence of noise and the like, so that the prefetch command may be ignored or an error may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the jackpot lottery prediction result indicates that if "00" is stored in 2 bits, it is out of the range, and if "01" is stored, it is a 15R normal jackpot. If "10" is stored, it indicates that it is a 15-probability variation jackpot (including 15R probability variation jackpot jackpot), and if "11" is stored, it indicates that it is a 2R probability variation jackpot. In addition, in the present embodiment, the 15R certainty variation jackpot is configured to be transmitted as the 15R certainty variation jackpot from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. It may be configured to be divided. The detachment may be divided into complete detachment, front / rear detachment, and reach other than front / rear detachment. In the case of such a configuration, the number of bits assigned to the lottery result increases, but the comparison between the prediction result of the jackpot determination of the prefetch command in the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop type determined at the start of the variation effect execution will be described in detail. Can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 8B3, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern indicates that if “000” is stored in 3 bits, it is out (short out, long out), and “001” is stored. It indicates normal reach, “010” indicates that it is a super reach, “011” indicates that it is a special reach, and “100” is stored. If it is a premier reach, it means that it is a 2R fluctuation if "101" is stored. In this embodiment, the normal reach, the super reach and the special reach are configured to include both the case of a big hit and the case of a miss, but each reach in the case of a big hit and each reach in the case of a miss You may comprise so that it may divide. When each reach in the case of a big hit and each reach in the case of a big hit are separated, the number of bits assigned to the variation type increases, but the prediction result of the variation pattern of the prefetch command in the voice lamp control device 113, It is possible to make a detailed comparison with the variation pattern determined when the variation effect execution is started.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command, it grasps the number of variable effects that are held in advance from the pre-reading pending count included in the pre-reading command, and then predicts the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the pre-reading command. Based on the result, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the pending variable effect.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the pre-reading command, for the number of pre-reading suspensions indicated by the pre-reading command, with respect to the number of executions of the variable effect. Thereby, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command may be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetching is performed. Therefore, the command is destroyed by determining whether or not the variation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Can determine whether or not.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is out of normal reach, and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetching process is “15R normal jackpot”, the fluctuation pattern command is determined by the prefetching process. It is determined that the predicted jackpot lottery prediction result does not match, and it is possible to determine that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is out of normal reach, even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead process is “out”, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is “out of range”. (Short deviation, long deviation) ”, it is determined that the variation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetching process, and either or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are executed. Can be identified as destroyed.

  Further, for example, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is “completely out”, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the prefetch process is “15R normal jackpot”, the stop type command is the prefetch It is determined that the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process does not match, and it is possible to determine that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed. In addition, when the stop type indicated by the stop type command is "completely missed", the variation pattern determination prediction result is "normal reach" even if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead process is "missed". In this case, it is determined that the stop type command does not match the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch process, and it can be determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 executes the prefetching process when the start winning is detected, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetching process are included in the prefetching command. By transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, more various controls can be realized in the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice from a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 425, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the ball entering the ball entrance is an important factor that determines the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from intentionally entering the ball entrance. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated by the player or the like, an error command for notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the error type. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a reserved ball number counter 223a and a prefetch information storage area 223b. The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the pending ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is managed by the reserved ball number counter 223a.

  Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 adds the holding ball number of the variable display by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the value of the holding ball counter 203a in the main control device 110 is added. When the number-of-holding-balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after the addition of the number-of-holding-balls counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the number-of-holding-balls (that is, the number is held in the main controller 110). The number of spheres of the displayed variable display) is stored in the sphere number counter 223a (see S1013 of FIG. 29).

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is received in accordance with the reception thereof. When the variable display mode on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved sphere number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 30). In this way, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. ..

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the holding ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, or the holding ball number counter 223a in response to receiving the variation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, the display hold command is sent to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the hold ball count counter 223a after being stored or updated.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number pattern corresponding to the value of the holding sphere number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1751 of FIG. 41A). As described above, the value of the reserved sphere number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The prefetch information storage area 223b is predicted by the main control device 110 by prefetching the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired with the start winning, and is indicated by the prefetch command transmitted by the main control device 110. This is an area for storing information indicating prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination.

  The read-ahead information storage area 223b is used by the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether or not the command received from the main control device 110 has been destroyed. The voice lamp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, If they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed, and the variation effect is switched to a special effect. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 compares the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b with the stop type indicated by the stop type command received from the main control device 110. If they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed, and the variable effect is switched to a special effect.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223b. The prefetch information storage area 223b has five areas of prefetch information 0th to 4th areas. Each of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is provided with a jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, a variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and a prefetch information valid flag. The jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area are areas for storing information indicating the above jackpot lottery prediction result and information indicating the variation pattern determination prediction result, respectively. The prefetch information valid flag is a flag indicating whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination stored in each of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is valid. It shows that the prediction result is valid. The read-ahead information valid flags of the read-ahead information Nos. 0 to 4 are all set to OFF as initial values in the RAM initial value setting process (see S810 in FIG. 26) executed when the power is turned on.

  In the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the same data as the jackpot lottery prediction result included in the prefetch command (see FIG. 8B2) is stored. That is, when the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is out, "00" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and when the jackpot lottery prediction result of the read-ahead command is 15R normal jackpot, the jackpot lottery prediction When "01" is stored in the result storage area and the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command is the 15R probability variable jackpot, "10" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the jackpot lottery prediction result of the look-ahead command. Is a 2R certainty variation jackpot, "11" is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area.

  Further, also in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, the same data as the data indicating the variation pattern determination prediction result included in the prefetch command (see FIG. 8B3) is stored. That is, when the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is out (short out, long out), “000” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is the normal reach. If it is, “001” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and if the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is super reach, “010” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. When the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command stored is "special reach", "011" is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, and the variation pattern determination prediction result of the prefetch command is premium reach. , "100" is stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area. When the variation pattern determination prediction result prefetch command was a 2R probability variation, "101" is stored in the change pattern determination prediction result storage area.

  In the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, the same data as the data showing the jackpot lottery prediction result and the variation pattern determination prediction result included in the prefetch command is the jackpot lottery. Although it is stored as information indicating the prediction result and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, it is not necessarily limited to this, and data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the look-ahead command may be different. After being converted into data, the converted data may be stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area as information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination. .

  Among the pre-reading information Nos. 0 to 4, in the pre-reading information fourth area, information indicating prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the pre-reading processing for the variation effect with the number of holding times of 4 is respectively It is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. That is, the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by prefetching the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding fourth area of the holding ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 The information indicating the prediction result is stored in the prefetch information fourth area.

  In addition, in the prefetch information first to third areas, similarly to the prefetch information fourth area, the prediction of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch for the variation effect with the holding number of 1 to 3 times, respectively. Information indicating the result is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area, respectively. That is, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination predicted by prefetching each counter value stored in the reserved third area of the reserved ball storage area 203b provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Is stored in the prefetch information third area and information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by prefetching each counter value stored in the reservation second area of the reservation ball storage area 203b is stored. The information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, which is predicted by pre-reading each counter value stored in the pre-reading information second area and stored in the holding first area of the holding sphere storage area 203b, is pre-reading. The information is stored in the first area.

  On the other hand, in the prefetch information No. 0 area, information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch with respect to the variation effect immediately before or during the execution, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern, respectively. It is stored in the judgment prediction result storage area. That is, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by pre-reading the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is shown. Information is stored in the prefetch information area 0.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command from the main control device 110, among the prefetch information first to fourth areas, the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the area corresponding to the prefetch pending count included in the prefetch command and Information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command are stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, respectively. Also, set the look-ahead information valid flag for the area in which the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination are set to ON, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination stored in that area are valid. Indicates.

  In the present embodiment, the data indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command is directly copied to the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and the data indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the prefetch command is changed as it is. By copying to the determination prediction result storage area, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination are easily stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area. .

  In addition, data different from the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the prefetch command and the data showing the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are set as the jackpot lottery as the information showing the prediction result of the jackpot drawing and the information showing the prediction result of the variation pattern determination. When storing in the prediction result storage area and the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area, a process of converting from the data showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination included in the prefetch command to the other data is performed. Then, the information showing the prediction result of the jackpot lottery after the conversion and the information showing the prediction result of the variation pattern determination are stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area.

  The number of times of pre-reading suspension included in the pre-reading command is an accurate representation of the number of times of pre-reading variable effect suspension in the main controller 110 as described above. Therefore, by storing the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command in the area corresponding to the prefetch pending count of the prefetch command among the prefetch information first to fourth areas, these results are predicted. It is possible to reliably store the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination in the area corresponding to the number of times the variation effect is held.

  On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, each of the data in the pre-read information first to fourth areas provided in the pre-read information storage area 223b is changed to the pre-read information 0 to 0. The process of shifting to 3 areas is executed. In this shift processing, first, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the prefetch information first area and the variation pattern determination stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area are stored. By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the prefetch information valid flag in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area and the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information 0th area, respectively, the prefetch information is stored. The data in the first area is shifted to the prefetch information area 0.

  Then, when the shift of the data to the prefetch information 0th area is completed, the prefetch information 1st area becomes empty, and thus the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 2nd to 4th areas is stored. , The information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination and the value of the prefetch information valid flag are set to the large hit lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information first to third areas each having a smaller area number 1. And the pre-reading information valid flag, the data in the pre-reading information second to fourth areas are respectively shifted to the pre-reading information first to third areas. Further, the prefetch information fourth area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information fourth area is not valid (that is, invalid). In order to indicate that, the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF.

  When the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it means that execution of the pending fluctuation effect 1 is started. Specifically, in the main controller 110, a shift process is performed between the pending ball execution area 203c and the pending first to fourth areas of the pending ball storage area 203b, and the counter C1 stored in the pending ball execution area 203c. Based on the respective values of C3 to CS1, the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect are determined.

  Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, by executing the shift process described above between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b each time the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, In each of the prefetch information first to fourth areas, it is possible to store the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, which are predicted for the variation effects with the holding numbers of 1 to 4 each time. Information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command can be stored in the prefetch information No. 0 area.

  Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b upon receiving the variation pattern command, the voice pattern controller 113 executes The variation pattern of the variation effect shown is compared with the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information area 0, and they are matched. By determining whether or not to do so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 110 has been destroyed. If they do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed in the command received from the main control device 110, and the variation effect mode is switched to the special variation effect. .

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 after the change pattern command, the stop type of the symbol after the change effect indicated by the stop type command and the prefetch information 0th. By comparing the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead with respect to the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the area, and determining whether or not they match, the main control device It is possible to determine whether the command received from 110 has been destroyed. Then, if the two do not match, it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command among the commands received from the main control device 110 are destroyed, and the variation effect mode is switched to the special variation effect. .

  In the present embodiment, the special variation effect that is switched when it is determined that the command is destroyed is a definite command transmitted from the main control device 110 (stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect). Until the command for confirming display is received, it is an effect that the third symbol display device 81 variably displays the third symbol at high speed. Further, in the special variation effect, a special stop symbol indicating a deviation as a stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed in response to the reception of the confirmation command. .

  When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 is destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed in the display control device 114, and the variation effect and the stop symbol. It may not be possible to confirm the display. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, the special variation effect is performed, and after the variation display, the special stop symbol indicating the special deviation is definitely displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from being mistakenly given a jackpot confirmed display effect.

  Moreover, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, so the game. The player can continue playing the game without anxiety. Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in the jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even if the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the command is destroyed by receiving the variation pattern command or the stop type command, the prefetch information first is determined prior to the determination. It is determined whether or not the prefetch information valid flag of the 0 area is ON. Only when the prefetch information valid flag is on, the command is destroyed based on the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot determination stored in the prefetch information 0th area or the information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern. It is configured to determine whether or not it has been performed.

  The reason for using the prefetch information valid flag in this way is as follows. That is, in the main controller 110, the prefetching process is not performed in the timer interrupt process that executes processes such as the detection of the start winning and the jackpot lottery, but is performed in the main process over time. Is. As a result, depending on the detection timing of the start winning, the prefetching process may not be performed for the variation effect held by the starting winning. Therefore, when the prefetch processing is not performed for the variation effect in which the variation pattern or the stop type command indicates the variation pattern or the stop type command, the reception of the variation pattern command causes the prefetch information 0 to 4 areas to be displayed. After the shift is performed, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination to be predicted by the prefetch are not stored in the prefetch information No. 0 area.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information fourth area which has become empty due to the shift is once set to OFF and the prefetch command is received, among the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas, In the area corresponding to the number of times of pre-reading indicated by the pre-reading command, information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery included in the pre-reading command is stored in the jackpot determination storage area and the pre-reading information valid flag is set to ON. . Then, each time the variation pattern command is received, the value of the prefetch information valid flag is shifted between the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 together with the information contained in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the like.

  As a result, when a variation pattern command or a stop type command is received, the result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination is predicted by pre-reading for the variation effect corresponding to the received command, and information indicating the prediction result Whether or not is effectively stored in the prefetch information 0th area can be easily determined by the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information 0th area. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the determination as to whether or not the command is destroyed based on the invalid information, and it is possible to easily and surely make the determination.

  In the present embodiment, the prefetch information valid flag is used to indicate whether or not the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is valid. However, by storing data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the prediction of the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 areas It may indicate that the information indicating the result is not valid, or by storing data other than the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination in the change pattern determination prediction result storage area, It may be indicated that the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination stored in the 0th to 4th areas is not valid.

  For example, the data indicating “111” is not specified in the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Therefore, when "111" is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information fourth area which has become empty due to the shift, and when it is determined whether or not the command is destroyed, If the data of “111” is stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information 0th area, the prefetch information 0th area relates to the information about the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination. It may be determined that the information is not effectively stored.

  In this way, data other than information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, and information indicating the variation pattern determination prediction result is stored in the change pattern determination prediction result storage area. By storing data other than the prefetch information, if it is shown that the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas is not valid, the prefetch information valid flag is newly added. Since it is not necessary to provide the above, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the RAM 223 due to the provision of the prefetch information storage area 223b.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition, the RAM 223 should start the variable effect in a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, or in the ON state. Has a variation start flag (not shown), a special variation flag (not shown) indicating that the variation effect is switched to the special variation effect in the ON state.

  The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 29) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1002 in FIG. 29). Then, when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (see S1102 in FIG. 30).

  The special variation flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command and the prediction of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination predicted in the prefetch process for the variation effect. The results are compared, and if they do not match, the result is set to ON (S1106 in FIG. 30). Then, when the special variable effect is set as the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81, it is turned off (S111 in FIG. 29).

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect and the continuation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It controls the notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A voltage of 5 V for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the voltages of 12 V, 5 V, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different winning probability for the big hit or the number of prize balls paid out in one big hit, a model having exactly the same design configuration as the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine) (for example, The ROM 22) of Patent Document 1 described above is not provided and stored, but is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 187 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as described above, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 connects the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the image controller 237. The video data is transferred to the normal video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the special program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of the above-mentioned Patent Document 1) provided like the conventional game machine. Since the image data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Data address conversion (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 187a to the outside or uses the other bank while the data is set in one bank and is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 181 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, an additional data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the work RAM 233 for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Of the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc., to be described later) used in the control program are all A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1202 in FIG. 31) executed after the boot process (see S1201 in FIG. 31) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  When the MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. , MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of the frames of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. Expand the image drawn in the buffer. Further, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of an image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a lower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be immediately drawn, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. The buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and has a storage capacity (for example, 132 kilobytes) for one block of the NAND flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234. ) Is included in the SRAM (Static RAM).

  Here, the MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 in the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), Transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  When the image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to various information of the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 temporarily stores the read data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 stores the read data. The image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 during the unused period (the period during which the read operation or the write operation is not performed). Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored at the storage source end address.

  If the buffer RAM 237a is not provided and the image data is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, and its read speed is slow. Therefore, while the image data of a desired size is being transferred, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 composed of the 1-port type DRAM has its 1 port occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 234, and the The time and other data cannot be accessed. Accordingly, during that time, the image controller 237a can read the image data from the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image, or transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81. There is a risk that the image display of the third symbol display device 81 will be delayed. Even when a multi-port type (type having a plurality of input / output ports) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, one port is occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the control using the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in the image controller 237a is limited, and the control may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, since the image controller 237 is provided with the buffer RAM 237a configured by the SRAM capable of high-speed operation, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After being stored, the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 436 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The display of the image on the third symbol display device 81 is to be periodically performed at regular time intervals (every 20 milliseconds in this embodiment), and the image controller 237 is the third symbol display device. In accordance with the display timing of the image in 81, the drawing of the image and the drawn image data must be transferred to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in order to access the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, it is necessary to prioritize reading of image data necessary for drawing and writing and reading of drawn image data.

  Here, normally, the scanning area in the display device such as the third symbol display device 81 is set larger than the display region in which the image is actually displayed, and the image is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. When displaying, while driving each pixel forming the screen (so-called raster scan) on the scanning area set to be larger than the display area, from left to right toward the screen, and from the top to the bottom, To be scanned. At this time, since the drawn image data is actually set only in the display area in which the image is displayed, the period (so-called blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area is The image controller 237 does not transfer the drawn image data to the third symbol display device 81.

  That is, during the blank period, even when the image is displayed by scanning the third symbol display device 81, an image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. There is no need to read the drawing image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 and transfer it to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, during this blank period, there is always a period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused, so that transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is By using the unused period of each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occurs during the blank period, it can be surely performed.

  The resident video RAM 235 is composed of a DRAM having an input / output port of 1 port (hereinafter referred to as "1 port type"), and image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is not overwritten during power-on. Used to continue to be retained. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235. In the resident video RAM 235, among the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81, data corresponding to the image displayed when the power is turned on, data corresponding to the frequently displayed image, and main control. Data corresponding to the image to be displayed immediately among the images whose display is determined by the device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, or the display control device 114 is transferred from the character ROM 234 and is made resident.

  On the other hand, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is configured by a 1-port type DRAM (Dynamic RAM). In the normal video RAM 236, when the image controller 237 draws the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 281 by using the image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data read from the character ROM 234 in advance. This is for temporarily storing image data. Further, the image data drawn by the image controller 237 (drawing image data) is alternately stored in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c provided in the normal video RAM 236, and the image controller 237 makes the third symbol. By transmitting the drawing image data stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c to the third symbol display device 281, in synchronization with the display timing of the display device 281, the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 281. The image corresponding to the data is displayed.

  The resident video RAM 189 is provided with at least a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on variation image area 235b, a back image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. .

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 164 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is performed. Hereinafter, the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on are collectively referred to as a power-on image.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1203 and S1204 in FIG. 31).

  Here, the power-on image will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. During the transfer of the remaining image data, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 is displayed in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of a “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. 11C. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. When the result is judged, the image shown in FIG. 11B is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped in the case of “big hit”, and the image shown in FIG. 11C is changed in the case of “out” in the variation effect. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 used the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 was transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. While the data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry that the operation has stopped. it can.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 264, a power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When the entry ball is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 such as the third symbol or the character symbol. Here, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12 and 13 are explanatory views for explaining three types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. Is for the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage”, FIG. 12 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 13 is for the back surface C corresponding to the “island stage” Are shown respectively.

  Of the back surfaces A to C, the back surface images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are, as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The display control device 114 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. After being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled by a simple connection.

  When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the “town stage” or the “empty stage”, the MPU 231 causes the corresponding back image to initially move from position a to position a ′ in the initial position of the display area. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image of the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, the rear image on the rear surface C is displayed on the third display in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... It is displayed on the device 281. Specifically, the back surface C is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the display position fixed, the third pattern It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 13A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 13C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 13C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 13A, and the back images of FIGS. 13A to 13C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 12A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Generally, since the game is often played without changing the stage while the town stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed, all the image data of the back face A corresponding to the town stage that is frequently displayed is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage has only a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b, the resident video RAM 235. The image is stored in the back image area 235c. In addition, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 13A, and the image data corresponding to the back images between FIGS. 13A and 13B except FIG. Is stored in the rear-side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the startup processing of the above. The area (range) of the screen image stored in the resident video RAM 235 is not limited to the above area (range) and may be set appropriately.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the back image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data of all the back images be resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, in that case, a very large capacity RAM must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a ′ or in FIG. Since the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b or the images between FIGS. 13A and 13B including is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234 is stored. Even if it is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data, the initial position of the back surface B or the back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the time is also changed. It can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or the color tone with the passage. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from the position a to the position b from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be completed while being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. This allows the image data from the position b ′ to the position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, on the rear surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images in FIGS. 13A and 13B are displayed by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 13 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 13 (b) to 13 (c) and 13 (c) to 13 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while the operation is being performed. The range of (b) to (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 13A to 13B, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 13B to 13C and 13C to 13A is stored in the normal video RAM 236. Since the image data of FIGS. 13A and 13B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the images are stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. By using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 13B to 13C and 13C to 13A can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. it can.

  The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 on the rear surface B and the rear surface C is stored in a sub-image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 10) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back surface image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back surface image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back surface image can be reliably displayed.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are the images corresponding to the image between position b ′ and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 435, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 187 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back surface of the game board 213, the voice lamp control device 113 causes the display control device to display a vibration error by an error command. Notify 114. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 435, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least the image storage area 236a, the first frame buffer 236b, and the second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 provides the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 designates each of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, and a clock counter. 233i, a stored image discrimination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on the command from the main control device 110, and the main control. For the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the device 110, an additional data table in which the display content to be displayed with the passage of time is described, and is displayed by the display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 out of the image data used in one rendering, and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, demonstration effect. Display data tables corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  Further, the final display effect is the third symbol display device when the stop symbol is finalized by receiving the final command (display final command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. It is the effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop symbol is a detached symbol, an effect of emphasizing the detachment is performed, and when the stop symbol is one of 15R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is highlighted. Directing is performed. By visually recognizing the finalized display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

  Further, in the restart effect, when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. In addition, it is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (swinged) around a predetermined position. In the third symbol display device 81, the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the variation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and that the stopped symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the demonstration effect, the fixed display effect, and the restart effect. Further, as for the variation display data table, which is the display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 variation effect patterns to be set, one table for one variation effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared. The variation display data table also includes a display pattern table for special variation which is set when the voice lamp controller 113 determines that the command received from the main controller 110 is destroyed.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since the display data table for change is fixed, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this rear surface type to display any of the rear surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table, but instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  The position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Good. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the image of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table). Based on the position of the rear surface image displayed at the stage where the drawing was performed and the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image indicated by the position information (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81) Specify.

  Further, the position information is, depending on the rear surface type, information indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of (displaying on the third symbol display device 81), or the type information of the position information together with the back surface type and the position information (for example, , Information indicating the elapsed time after the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or drawing of an image based on the display data table (or of the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether or not the display time is information indicating the elapsed time from the start) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. In the display data table, instead of directly defining the type of the third symbol, the offset information is defined. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol and the current time of the variation effect performed before. This is because it changes depending on the stop design of the variation effect that is performed. From the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, as the symbol offset information at each address, the difference between the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago. Enter. As a result, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, as the symbol offset information at each address, the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113. Describe the difference with the stop symbol set according to the received stop type command (display stop type command). As a result, the third symbol that is variably displayed in the variable effect can be stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Then, the pointer 233g is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233g, and the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, the effect images are diversified. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. It is possible to create, because in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display content to be displayed with the passage of time for the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. It was done. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one effect. Then, it includes the concept of superimposing another effect on the one effect, changing part or all of the tone in the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. .

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. Or the drawing content required to change a part or all of the color tone in the one effect, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one effect Is.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the continuous notice additionally displayed to the fluctuation effect displayed by the fluctuation display data table selected based on the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) from the main controller 110. A case where the display content for displaying the effect is defined by the additional data table will be described.

  That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to the continuous notice effect additionally set for the variable effect, and specifically, the display mode of the continuous notice effect is “bubble” or “egg”. , “Chick”, “chicken”, and “chicken group” are stored in the data table storage area 233b.

  In the additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the like are set according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, the two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and the two characters (character 1, character 2) are associated with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table, respectively. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. On the other hand, when there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponds to the address "0001H" in FIG. 15).

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 15, "00FDH") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the additional data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 receives the continuous notice command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads an additional data table according to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the data table storage area 233b, and the additional data table of the work RAM 233 described later. It is stored in the buffer 233e. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. After that, the contents of the image to be drawn next are specified to create a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 15, when the pointer 233g becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is defined in various sprites defined in the display data table address “0097H” and in the additional data table address “0097H”. The effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 sprites are added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0001H", Null data is defined in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is displayed. A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in "0001H". Further, when the information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233g indicates an address not defined in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 15, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233g indicates an address after "00FEH"), and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by sending the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified by the display data table, and the drawing contents specified by the additional data table are added. The image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. When another effect image (for example, a continuous notice effect image) is displayed in addition to the effect image (for example, a variable effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the additional effect image to be additionally displayed is added. By setting in the data table buffer 233e, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display defining an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is separately prepared, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 kinds of display data tables must be prepared. As with the pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By separately defining, it is sufficient to prepare 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b. Therefore, it is possible to store a data table corresponding to various effect modes in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily further diversify effect images.

  Further, like the present pachinko machine 10, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even when the display of another effect image to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Only by setting in the data table buffer 233e, another effect image to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

  Since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233e and the additional data table buffer 233d are set. From the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer while updating the pointer 233g at each time, and to easily create one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, even in the case where the sound lamp control device 113 or the like determines the display of another effect in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effect to be additionally displayed is displayed. By defining the display contents with the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a variety of effect displays from a small number of data tables.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 16). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponds to the address "0002H" in FIG. 16).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. (Starting address of storage destination) is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 16, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that point in time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while creating a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later. Is acquired and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233g becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information defined in the address of the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It is added to the drawing list created based on it, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table 344d. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is desired. At this timing, the character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, it is possible to instruct the transfer start timing. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to easily display various effect images on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1205 in FIG. 31). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S2105 in FIG. 43 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S1401 in FIG. 33), and the simple image display flag is displayed. If 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S1408 of FIG. 33B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 33 (b) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) S1409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 113 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 38) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 39 to 42) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S2001 in FIG. 43A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 43B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 44) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for the is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The additional data table buffer 233e is displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the effect (continuous notice effect, etc.). The MPU 231 writes Null data, which means that there is no display object to be additionally displayed in the additional data table buffer 233e, in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Clear the contents.

  After that, the MPU 231 is based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113, and in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. If there is an effect to be additionally displayed by judging the presence / absence, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one and, in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g and the additional data table buffer 233e. Based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table, a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) describing the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. . Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. In addition, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the Null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, so that the third symbol display device 81 has the effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as is.

  The transfer data table buffer 233f is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233f. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233f.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while adding the pointer 233g one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233g is a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e and a transfer data table buffer 233f respectively stored in the respective buffers of the display data table, the additional data table and the transfer data table, and the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image. This is for designating an address from which data transfer data information should be acquired. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed (S1403 in FIG. 33). (See S1709 in FIG. 39), the value of the pointer 233g is incremented by one.

  Every time such updating of the pointer 233g is performed, the MPU 231 selects the address indicated by the pointer 233g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. A drawing list (see FIG. 17) which will be described later is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in the above, and at the same time, a predetermined sprite from which the transfer is started from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. The transfer data information of the image data is acquired and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

  As a result, when the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, that effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 17, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The MPU 231 uses the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e to draw the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g and other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, based on the contents of (for example, a held image displaying the number of held balls and a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error) ) Is generated and the detailed list is rearranged for each sprite to create a drawing list.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, and other image contents. Generated according to the sprite type. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 displays the display data table and the additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  The drawing list also includes transfer data information. This information is image data transfer instruction information for the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. The transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the storage destination where the transfer target image data is to be stored. It is configured to include information (information indicating the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the head address (storage destination head address).

  For example, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). Transfer data information corresponding to the drawing list is generated from the storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address where the transfer target image data is to be stored), and is added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and transferred to a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage destination start address) of the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The clock counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed (see FIG. 33). Each time the display setting process is executed, the clock counter 233i is decremented by 1 (see S1711 in FIG. 39). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

  For the stored image discrimination flag 233j, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, is the image data corresponding to that sprite stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236? It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not.

  The stored image determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S1202 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231. . In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, since all the image data of the sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state because the image data of the one sprite is stored. , The storage state corresponding to all the sprites in the non-storage state is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is Then, it is determined whether or not the image is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S2216 in FIG. 44). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S2217 in FIG. 44). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2302 in FIG. 45).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 33) is executed (see S2302 in FIG. 45).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 18 to 25. The process of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a regular process (in this embodiment, a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. By the MPU 201 executing this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command or the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, or the like is generated based on various processes, and is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

  For example, it transmits the number-of-holding-balls command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 20) and the fluctuation start process (FIG. 21), which is one process of the fluctuation process, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the sphere emission signal set when the sphere is emitted in the process of S111 described later is transmitted to the emission control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process for executing is performed (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly described, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes, and the second symbol display device 83 The variable display of the second symbol is carried out. And the lottery of the 2nd symbol is implemented by the value of the 2nd hit random number counter C4, and when the 2nd symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the 1st entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S106). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interruption processing to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the per stop type counter CS1 and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented, and the counter values thereof are maximum values. (In the present embodiment, when it reaches 899, 99, 99, 198, 250, respectively), it is cleared to 0 respectively. When the first random number counter C1 or the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set to the first random number counter C1 or It is read as an initial value of the second per random number counter C2, and the initial value is set in the first per random number counter C1 or the second per random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first entrance The start winning process associated with the winning of 64 is executed (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. Then, when the sphere is turned on, in order to transmit the sphere firing signal to the firing control device 112, the information of the sphere firing signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interruption process to be executed next.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19, a start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area in order to pre-read the pending counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the execution start timing of the variable effect. The processing to be stored in 203e is executed.

  When the MPU 201 executes the start winning process, first, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S201). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the number-of-hold-balls counter 203a (the suspension of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number N of balls is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S202).

  Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 but the number N of operation-holding balls is not N <4 (S202: No) , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S203), and in order to transmit the holding ball number command including the value of the holding ball number counter 203a after addition (holding ball number N) to the voice lamp control device 113, the holding ball number command is provided in the RAM 203. The specified command transmission ring buffer. As a result, the number-of-holding-balls command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer, and the hold number is set in the hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Of the first to fourth areas, a first random number counter storage area 203b1, a first hit type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter 203b3, and a change type counter storage of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved sphere number counter 203a. Each area is reserved (stored) in the area 203b4 (S205).

  Specifically, if the value of the number of holding balls counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the holding first area. Further, if the value of the retained sphere number counter 203a after addition is “2”, it is stored in each storage area of the reserved second area, and if the value of the retained sphere number counter 203a after addition is “3”, the reserved third area. If the value of the holding sphere number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each of the storage areas, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the holding fourth area.

  When the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect has come, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in the holding ball storage area 203b by the processing of S205 are set in the holding order in the holding ball execution area 203c. Shift to. Then, the jackpot lottery, variation pattern determination, and the like are executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As described above, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b are used in the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, which are performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S206 to S213 performed subsequent to the processing of S205, the prefetch processing of prereading the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the processing of S205 is executed prior to the execution start timing of the variable effect. In order to do so, the respective values are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the first prefetch processing flag 203f is on (S206). Here, if the first pre-reading processing flag 203f is off (S206: Yes), the pre-reading processing execution is started even while the pre-reading processing is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d. This means that you are not waiting. Therefore, the first prefetch flag 203d is set to ON (S207), and the first random number counter storage area 203d1, the first per type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter 203d3, and the first prefetch execution area 203d are set. In the variation type counter storage area 203d4, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S205, respectively. The value is stored (S208).

  As a result, in the main controller 110, in the prefetch process (see FIG. 25) executed in the main process described later, the first prefetch execution area is irrespective of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. By pre-reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203d, the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be predicted in advance. Then, the prediction result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command.

  Further, by turning on the first prefetch processing flag 203f, it is possible to notify the prefetch processing that the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 have been newly stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, and the first prefetch processing can be performed. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the 1-prefetch execution area 203d can be prefetched. Further, by keeping the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f on until the prefetch processing is completed, it is possible to prevent another counter value from being overwritten in the first prefetch execution area 203d.

  After the process of S208, the value of the reserved ball number command 203a (reserved ball number N) added by the process of S203 is stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d (S209). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S206, when it is determined that the first prefetch processing flag 203f is on (S206: Yes), the prefetch processing is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. Is being executed, or is waiting for the start of prefetch processing execution. Therefore, the processes of S207 to S209 are not executed, and the process proceeds to S210. As a result, the values of the various counters stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are maintained.

  In the processing of S210, it is determined whether or not the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g is on (S210). Then, if the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is off (S210: Yes), even if the pre-reading processing is being executed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e, waiting for the start of the pre-reading processing is started. It means nothing in particular. Therefore, the second prefetching flag 203e is set to ON (S211), and the first per random number counter storage area 203e1, the first per type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter 203e3, and the second prefetch execution area 203e. In the variation type counter storage area 203e4, the first random number counter C1, the first permissible type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored last in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S205, respectively. The value is stored (S212).

  As a result, in the main controller 110, in the prefetch process (see FIG. 25) executed in the main process described later, the second prefetch execution area is irrespective of the execution interval (4 milliseconds) of the timer interrupt process. By pre-reading the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in 203e, the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination can be predicted in advance. Then, the prediction result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prefetch command.

  Further, by turning on the second pre-reading processing flag 203g, it is possible to notify the pre-reading processing that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are newly stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e. 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the prefetch execution area 203e can be prefetched. Further, by keeping the second pre-reading processing flag 203g on until the pre-reading processing ends, it is possible to prevent another counter value from being overwritten in the second pre-reading execution area 203e.

  After the processing of S212, the value of the reserved sphere number command 203a (reserved sphere number N) added by the processing of S203 is stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e (S213). Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S210, when it is determined that the second prefetching flag 203g is on (S210: Yes), the second prefetching execution area 203d is stored in addition to the first prefetching execution area 203d. It means that the prefetching process is being executed by each of the counters C1 to C3 or CS1 or is waiting for the start of the prefetching process execution. Therefore, the processes of S211 to S213 are not executed and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the values of the various counters stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e are maintained. Further, in this case, the pre-reading process is not executed for the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S205 in the main winning award process.

  As described above, according to the present start-up winning process, the pre-reading process is performed by the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding pre-reading execution area by the first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g. It is determined whether or not it is being executed or is waiting for the start of prefetch processing. If the pre-reading process or the execution start standby is in progress, the corresponding pre-reading execution area is overwritten with the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of detecting the start winning. Can be suppressed. Therefore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the MPU 201 will win a prize (start prize) to the first entrance 64 later. Even in such a case, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are kept held until the prefetch processing is completed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the prefetching process by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e.

  Further, when the first pre-reading processing flag 203f or the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to ON, the pre-reading processing (see FIGS. 24 and 25) repeatedly executed in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 is performed. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch execution areas corresponding to the prefetching in progress flags 203f and 203g in which the ON state is detected are prefetched, and the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are predicted. . Then, based on the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, a prefetch command including information on the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the set prefetch command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. To do.

  In this way, at the start of the variation effect, each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 held by the starting prize detected after the starting prize corresponding to the variation effect is not read ahead and prefetched, In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) are temporarily set to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e. Of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, the prefetch processing is executed in the main processing. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is one of the timer interruption processing executed prior to the main processing, in the variation start processing (see FIG. 21). Run in

  Here, as in the present embodiment, in addition to the jackpot lottery performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect, the pre-reading process of predicting the results of the jackpot lottery or the like by pre-reading each counter value acquired and reserved at the time of winning the start prize When the pachinko machine is configured to execute, in the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning and the individual winning value one by one, while the prefetching value is also used in the prefetching process. And each hit value must be compared one by one. As a result, the comparison process between the counter value and each individual winning value must be repeated for the maximum number of winning values in both the big hit lottery and the pre-reading process. In particular, when the pachinko machine is in a high probability state, for example, if the number of winning values is 30 in the high probability state, the above-described comparison process is repeated up to 30 times in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetch process. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value with the winning value in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  Under such circumstances, like the conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the variation effect, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the winning award detected after the starting award corresponding to the variation effect are held. When pre-reading processing using, before and after the jackpot lottery at the start of the execution of the variation production, if the prediction of the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the look-ahead at the time of starting winning is done, it will be the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected due to delays in the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

  Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the variation effect and executing the jackpot lottery, and a start winning detection to obtain the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a prefetch process are executed. When configured to include processing, there may be a case where the jackpot lottery processing and the pre-reading processing are both performed in one timer interrupt processing based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . Since each process may take a long processing time as described above, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the fluctuation effect is one process of the timer interruption process. It is configured to be executed in the start process (see FIG. 21). As a result, even if the prefetching process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the prefetching process is continuously executed after the end of the timer interrupt process, the prefetching process can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning for the first entrance 64 is detected. While predicting the result of the big hit lottery or the like, the big hit lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e as well as the reserved ball number storage area 203b. The pre-reading process is executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e. Here, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere number storage area 203b are directly read out to perform the prefetching process, when the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the prefetching process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) of the holding ball storage area 203b are shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c or another holding area. As a result, it is necessary to change the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetching process every time the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pre-reading process is executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e, the fluctuation occurs during the pre-reading process. Even when the effect execution start timing comes and the variation start process is executed, the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the pre-reading process. Since it is sufficient to continue to refer to, the processing can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the first prefetch flag 203f or until the prefetch processing is completed. By setting the second pre-reading processing flag 203g to ON, even if a new start winning is detected during execution of the pre-reading processing, the counter acquired with the new start winning is acquired. Depending on the values of C1 to C3 and CS1, it is possible to prevent the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e in the prefetch process from being overwritten. Therefore, the prefetching process can be surely executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning is detected, both the first prefetching process flag 203f and the second prefetching process flag 203g are on, and the first prefetching execution area 203d and the second prefetching execution area 203e. If all are in the pre-reading process, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in association with the start winning are set to the first pre-reading execution area 203d and the second pre-reading execution area. It is also not stored in 203e. As a result, the pre-reading process is not performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the start winning, but the pre-reading process is, as described above, the setting of the continuous notice effect and the voice lamp control device. This is for performing the process of determining the destruction of the command transmitted to 113, and since it does not directly affect the game, there is no problem.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two pre-reading execution areas, that is, a first pre-reading execution area 203d and a second pre-reading execution area 203e are prepared, and one of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of winning the start prize. Is configured to store. Therefore, even if a new start winning is detected while the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are executing the prefetch process are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, the prefetch is performed in the second prefetch execution area 203e. If the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are executing the process are not stored, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired with the new start winning are stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Then, the prefetch process can be executed using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a group in which the prefetch processing is not executed among the groups of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 which are acquired by the start winning and are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b, and the number of groups can be increased as much as possible. On the other hand, the prefetching process can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the pre-reading reserved number storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are provided in the pre-reading execution areas 203d and 203e, the start winning is detected, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-reading execution. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a at the time of being stored in the areas 203d and 203e (the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after adding 1 to the start winning) is the prefetch reserved number storage area 203d5, 203e5 as the prefetch reserved number. Stored in. Further, the prefetch pending counts stored in the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are changed at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect while the prefetch processing in progress flags 203f and 203g of the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are on, and change. Each time the start process is executed, it is decremented by 1 (see S306 to S309 in FIG. 20).

  As a result, the read-ahead hold count stored in the read-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represents the hold count of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding read-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, when the prefetch command is generated based on the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch process, the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5, 203e5 should be included in the prefetch command. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command can accurately grasp the number of times of holding the variable effect executed according to the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch process.

  Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the continuous notice effect is set on the basis of the result of the prefetching process, the start winning award which is a trigger to acquire the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetching process is performed is set. It is possible to reliably set the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect for the previous or previous starting winning. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, by holding the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command for the number of times the variation effect is executed, by the number of prefetch suspensions indicated by the prefetch command, The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetch is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the variation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  Next, the variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process, executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S109). The variation process (S109) is to control the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). As the big hit, during the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of big hit, and during the predetermined time after the big hit game is included. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), then, after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), this processing is ended as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N of balls in the variable display, which is reserved in the main controller 110) It is determined whether is larger than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the number-of-holding-balls 203a (number-of-holding-balls N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to start execution of the variable effect, and first, the value of the number-of-holding-balls counter 203a (holding The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S311) starts the execution of one variation effect of the variation effects that have been suspended, so that the number of reserved balls decreases by one.

  Further, it is determined whether or not the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f is on (S306), and if it is on (S306: Yes), it is stored in the prefetch reservation number storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. The prefetch pending count is decremented by 1 (S307), and the process proceeds to S308. On the other hand, if the first prefetch processing flag 203f is off (S306: No), the process of S307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S308.

  Further, in the process of S308, it is determined whether or not the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g is on (S308), and if it is on (S308: Yes), the prefetch hold count storage area of the second prefetch execution area 203e. One is subtracted from the prefetch pending count stored in 203e5 (S309), and the process proceeds to S310. On the other hand, if the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g is off (S308: No), the process of S309 is skipped and the process proceeds to S310.

  In this way, the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage areas 203d5, 203e5 is set to the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect while the prefetch processing flags 203f, 203g of the corresponding prefetch execution areas 203d, 203e are on. Then, each time the fluctuation start process (S311) is executed, it is decremented by one.

  As a result, the read-ahead hold count stored in the read-ahead hold count storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 accurately represents the hold count of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the corresponding read-ahead execution areas 203d and 203e. Become. Therefore, by including the pre-reading reserved number stored in the pre-reading reserved number storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 in the pre-reading command, the voice lamp control device 113 that receives this pre-reading command causes the jackpot lottery and variation pattern obtained by the pre-reading process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times the variable effect is held according to the determination prediction result.

  Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the continuous notice effect is set on the basis of the result of the prefetching process, the start winning award which is a trigger to acquire the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 for which the prefetching process is performed is set. It is possible to reliably set the continuous announcement effect for the variable effect for the previous or previous starting winning. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, by holding the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command for the number of times the variation effect is executed, by the number of prefetch suspensions indicated by the prefetch command, The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command can be associated with the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted by the main control device 110 for the variation effect for which the prefetch is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the variation pattern command or the stop type command received from the main control device 110 matches the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the destruction of the command.

  After the processing of S309 or after the negative determination (S308: No) is made in the processing of S308, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S310). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area 203b toward the reserved sphere execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted such as the area 203c, the reserved second area → the reserved first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second area, and the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area.

  After the data shift process of S310, based on the values of the various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the data shift process, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed. (S311), and returns to the timer interrupt process. The fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (reserved ball number N) is 0 (S304: No), the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S312). In this determination processing, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until the value of the number of held balls counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is determined to be greater than 0. It is determined that the period is being demonstrated.

  When it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S312: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S312: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S313 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S101 of FIG. 18) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command to the display control device 114 as it is, and the display control device 114 controls to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the variable display is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the changing time has elapsed (S314). The display time during change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and this change time elapses. If not (S314: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S315), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the fluctuation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S314: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S316). The stop symbol is preset by a fluctuation start process (S311) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the process of S310, and if it is a big hit, the first winning type counter C2 Depending on the value of, a pattern that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R probability variation premium jackpot (probability variation jackpot that the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds jackpot) It is determined whether a symbol that will be a high probability jackpot that will shift to a high probability state later or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the 15R probability variation jackpot is hit after the jackpot, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the red LED and the blue color when the 15R regular jackpot is hit. Turn on the LED and. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Although each LED is turned off when the next variation display is started, the LEDs may be illuminated only for a few seconds after the variation is stopped.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S316, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. Then, a confirmation command is set (S317) for confirmation display, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. Thereby, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the confirmation command and to confirm the stop symbol.

  Next, the fluctuation start process (S311), which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S311). This variation start process (S311) performs lottery (big hit lottery) or "big hit lottery" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and the first symbol display device 37. And the effect pattern (change pattern) of the change effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the fluctuation start process, first, a jackpot lottery (winning / absence determination) process for determining whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is the normal low-probability state, “7,307,582” out of the numerical values 0 to 899 of the first random number counter C1 is the winning value ( The winning value). In addition, when the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a high probability state, “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, "448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836,866,892" is the winning value. In the process of S401, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved sphere storage area is compared with these hit values, and when they match, it is determined that it is a big hit. .

  Then, as a result of the processing in S401, if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c and the jackpot shown in FIG. The display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the type table (S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type table is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, that is, the jackpot type becomes the high-probability state after the jackpot of which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. 15R probability jackpot to transition, 15R probability variation jackpot which is one of 15R probability variation jackpot, 15R regular jackpot to shift to low probability state after maximum round number 15 round jackpot, maximum round number 2 round jackpot It is then determined whether or not the 2R certainty variation jackpot is to shift to the high probability state later. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols in various jackpots corresponding to the jackpot type, jackpot type (15R certainty variation jackpot (including 15R certainty variation premium jackpot), 2R certainty variation jackpot, 15R regular jackpot) By setting the stop type as it is, the display mode at the time of a big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B, it is determined by the process of S402 from among various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, premier reach A to C, and 2R variations A to C. The jackpot type and the jackpot variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c are determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the variation time is determined in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the big hit symbol is stopped. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the third mode is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, either front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach, or complete outreach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type varies depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S405). Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variable time until the stop symbol is displayed as a deviation symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state excluding the time saving state, short deviation, long deviation, based on the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 7C, At the time of disengagement associated with the stop type set by the processing of S404 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c from the various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. Fluctuation pattern is determined.

  Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, short reach, long loss, and release normal reach based on the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7D. Variations at the time of disengagement associated with the stop type set by the process of S404 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c from among various types, various super-reach types, and special reach types. The pattern is determined. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  When the process of S403 or the process of S405 is finished, next, based on the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, the variation of notifying the variation pattern type to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S402 or S404 is set (S407), and the process returns to the variation process. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) to be executed next, these commands are voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and transmits the display variation pattern command and the display type command to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S601). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S611 also in this case.

  If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. Therefore, in such a case also, the process proceeds to S611. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S708 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S612, S613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S612, S613) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S613). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S608). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, interruption is permitted (S610). Then, the process shifts to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. First, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process, roughly divided are a prefetch process, a counter update process, and a power-off process.

  In the main process, first, a prefetch process is executed (S701). Here, the details of the prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process. This pre-reading process pre-reads each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired with the detection of the start winning before referring to the big hit lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect, and preliminarily detects the big hit lottery. This is a process of predicting a result or a determination result of a variation pattern.

  In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the first pre-reading processing flag 203f is on (S751). As a result, if the first prefetching process flag 203f is on (S751: Yes), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in association with the detection of the start winning is detected in the start winning process (see FIG. 19). The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d, which means that the first prefetch execution area 203d is on standby to start the prefetch processing.

  Therefore, in this case, the processes of S752 to S755 are executed to prefetch the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. First, in the process of S752, the result of the big hit lottery is predicted from the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hit random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in the first look-ahead execution area 203d matches the hit value described above, and when it matches one of the hit values, it is predicted that the jackpot is a big hit. Also, if all hit values do not match, it is predicted to be out of alignment.

  The winning value is set according to the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original big hit lottery (big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value. To be done. That is, when the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the prefetched counter value is predicted to be a normal low probability state, the winning value is “7, 307,582 ". On the other hand, if the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-read counter value is predicted to be in the high probability state, the winning value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ".

  Further, in the process of S752, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is predicted to be a jackpot, the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the first prefetch execution area 203d is further set. It reads ahead and predicts the result of the jackpot type determination. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of the first prefetch execution area 203d according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 7A. .

  Then, in the process of S752, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is finally classified into four patterns of “out”, “15R normal jackpot”, “15R probability variation jackpot”, and “2R probability variation jackpot”. .

  In addition, the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value is a prediction result of the jackpot type determination. Predict based on. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot type determination is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is high in the prefetch processing performed thereafter. Predict as a stochastic state. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot type determination is “15R normal jackpot”, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low-probability state in the pre-reading process performed thereafter. .

  However, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading processing of the counter values corresponding to all the variation effects is not necessarily executed, so only the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the processing of S752 is used for the original jackpot machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is performed. There is a risk that the prediction of the possible states (modes) of (1) will greatly deviate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the possible states (modes) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed are predicted.

  That is, when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both low probability states, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 If only one moves to the high-probability state, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high-probability state in the prefetching process that is performed thereafter. In addition, when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both high probability states, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 If only the state shifts to the low-probability state, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the low-probability state in the prefetching process to be performed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to more accurately predict the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both low probability states, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 In the pre-reading process to be performed thereafter, only the state that the pachinko machine 10 can assume when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a high probability state, or the actual pachinko machine When the gaming state of 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are carried out are both high probability states, only the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a low probability state. As a result of the transition, in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is set to the low probability state. If predicted, may transmit the predicted state change command for notifying that the to voice lamp control unit 113. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives this prediction state change command, even if all the prefetch information valid flags of the prefetch information 0th area to the 4th area provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are turned off. Good.

  When the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is changed by the above-described case, the prediction result by the look-ahead performed before that is the pachinko when the original jackpot lottery is performed. There is a high possibility that the state that the machine 10 can take is erroneously predicted. Therefore, when the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is changed in the above-described case, the predicted state change command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 Based on the reception of the predicted state change command, by setting all the prefetch information valid flags of the prefetch information 0th area to the 4th area provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b to off, the prefetch information is set at that time. It is possible to invalidate all the various prediction results stored in the information storage area 223b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from performing various controls by pre-reading such as command destruction determination based on an incorrect prediction result.

  In addition, after transmitting the prediction state change command to the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 uses the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are held in the hold ball storage area 203b at that time to detect the pachinko machine 10. The prefetch process may be executed again based on the correct state that can be taken. Specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the one holding area in which various counter values are held among the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203b are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d. It is also possible to transfer and store the number of holdings corresponding to the holding area as the number of read-ahead holdings in the read-ahead holding number storage area 203d5, and further set the first read-ahead processing flag 203f to ON. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 of the other holding areas in which various counter values are held are transferred to the second prefetch execution area 203e, and the number of holding times corresponding to the holding area is set as the number of preread holding times and the number of preread holding times is set. It may be stored in the storage area 203e5, and the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g may be set to ON. Thereby, the pre-reading process is executed on each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d and the second pre-reading execution area 203f, based on the correct state that the pachinko machine 10 can take. It is possible to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls by using more prediction results.

  When the pre-reading process is executed again in this way, the counter values may be stored in the pre-reading execution area in order from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area having the smaller area number. . With this, the pre-reading process can be sequentially executed from the counter value immediately before the original lottery is executed, and thus more prediction results can be obtained before the original lottery is executed. In addition, when there are three or more reservations in the reservation ball storage area 203b, the values of the two reservation area counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are once transferred to the first prefetch execution area 203d and the second prefetch execution area 203e. After executing the prefetching process again, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 in the holding area at that time may be transferred to the prefetching execution area where the execution of the prefetching process is completed.

  In the subsequent process of S753, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d are prefetched and the result of the fluctuation pattern determination is predicted (S753). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S752 is a jackpot, various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and premiere are based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B. From the reach A to C, 2R fluctuations A to C, the prediction result of the jackpot type determination predicted by the process of S752 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d The variation pattern associated with the value of is predicted.

  When the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S752 is out of the range, first, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first prefetch execution area 203d. Then, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is predicted from the front / rear outreach, the reach other than the front / rear outreach, and the complete outreach. At this time, similar to the process of S404 of the variation start process (see FIG. 21), it is predicted when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the timing of starting the execution of the variation effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value. Depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 can be in a low-probability state or a high-probability state, tables with different stop pattern selection counter C3 values corresponding to the respective stop types are set.

  Then, based on the predicted stop type, according to the possible state of the pachinko machine predicted when the original jackpot lottery is performed, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7C or FIG. The determination result of the fluctuation pattern is predicted based on any of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern tables shown in (d). That is, when the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be the low probability state in the normal time excluding the time saving state, the deviation (normal) variation shown in FIG. 7C. Based on the pattern table, the predicted stop type is selected from among short misalignment, long misalignment, misalignment normal reach, misalignment super reach, misalignment special reach, and the variable type counter storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d. The variation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the variation type counter CS1 is predicted.

  Further, when the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a short-time state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, the variation pattern for deviation (probability change) shown in FIG. 7D. Based on the table, the predicted stop type and the variable type counter storage area 203d5 of the first look-ahead execution area 203d are stored from among short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach, deviation super reach, and deviation special reach. A fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the fluctuation type counter CS1 is predicted.

  In the process of S753, finally, as the prediction result of the variation pattern determination, four patterns of “out”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, “premier reach”, and “2R probability change” are classified. That is, when the predicted fluctuation pattern is “short deviation” or “long deviation”, it is classified as “out”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various normal reach” or “various normal reach”, it is classified as “normal reach”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various types of super reach" or "various types of super reach", it is classified as "super reach". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “various special reach” or “various special reach”, it is classified as “special reach”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “premier reach A” to “premier reach C”, it is classified as “premier reach”. When the predicted fluctuation pattern is “2R fluctuation A” to “2R fluctuation C”, it is classified into “2R fluctuation”.

  Then, in the subsequent processing of S754, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted in the processing of S752, the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted in the processing of S753, and the pre-reading reserved number storage area 203d5 of the first pre-reading execution area 203d. The pre-reading command shown in FIG. 8 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the pre-reading pending count stored in (1) is set (S754). The prefetch command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) to be executed next, this prefetch command is the voice lamp control. Sent to the device 113.

  In the process of S754, if the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is not set and the prefetch command is not set. Move to processing. As described above, this prefetching process is performed independently of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the main process. As a result, the timer interrupt process is executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds even while the prefetch process 1 is being executed. Then, in the variation process (FIG. 20) which is one process of the timer interrupt process, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is detected, it is put on hold regardless of whether or not the prefetch process is being executed. The execution of the variable effect is started. Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the prefetching process, the actual jackpot lottery or the like may occur before the prefetching process is completed.

  Here, when the execution timing of the fluctuating effect is detected, in the above-described fluctuating process, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of prefetching suspensions is executed (S306 to S309). Therefore, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process before the prefetching process is completed, the prefetching pending count is 0 or a negative value. Will be shown. On the other hand, when the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed prior to the prefetching process, the prefetching command cannot be set or the destruction determination of the command cannot be performed, and thus the prefetching command is transmitted to the voice lamp control unit 113. You don't have to.

  Therefore, in the processing of S754, if the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is not set By shifting to the processing, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transmission of the prefetch command to the voice lamp control device 113, and useless communication is performed between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to process the result of the prefetching process for the one in which the variation effect has already started, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from being overloaded with an excessive processing load.

  It should be noted that whether or not the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 203d5 of the first prefetch execution area 203d indicates 0 or a negative value is determined not only by the processing of S754 but also by the processing of S752 to S754. It may be performed at any time. Then, when the prefetch pending count indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S755.

  When the process of S754 is completed, the first prefetching flag 203f is then set to OFF (S755), and the counters C1 to C3 that are in the prefetching process or waiting to start execution of the prefetching process are set in the first prefetching execution area 203d. , CS1 values are not stored, and the process proceeds to S756.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S751, if it is determined that the first prefetching flag 203f is not on, that is, it is off (S751: No), the execution of prefetching processing is started in the first prefetching execution area 203d. This means that the values of the waiting counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored. Therefore, the prefetching process for the first prefetching execution area 203d in S752 to S755 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S756.

  In the processing of S756, it is determined whether or not the second prefetch processing flag 203g is on (S756). As a result, if the second prefetching processing flag 203g is on (S756: Yes), the counter stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b in association with the detection of the start winning is detected in the start winning process (see FIG. 19). The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are also stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e, which means that the second prefetch execution area 203e is on standby for the start of prefetch processing.

  Therefore, in this case, the processes of S757 to S760 are executed to prefetch the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second prefetch execution area 203e. Among them, the processing of S757 is the same as the processing of S752, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second prefetch execution area 203e and the per This is performed for the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the type counter storage area 203e2. Then, also in the processing of S757, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is finally classified into four patterns of “out”, “15R regular jackpot”, “15R probability variation jackpot”, and “2R probability variation jackpot”. To do.

  In the process of S757, the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect) is performed based on the prefetched counter value is also predicted. , S752, similarly to the processing of S757, based on the prediction result of the jackpot type determination performed in the processing of S757.

  Further, the processing of S758 is the same processing as the processing of S753, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and jackpot type determination by the processing of S757, the stop pattern stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. This is performed for the value of the selection counter C3 and the value of the stop type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203e5. Then, in the process of S758, finally, the prediction results of the fluctuation pattern determination are classified into four patterns of “out”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, “premier reach”, and “2R probability change”.

  Then, in the subsequent processing of S759, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted in the processing of S757, the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted in the processing of S758, and the prefetch pending count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e. The pre-reading command shown in FIG. 8 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the pre-reading pending count stored in (1) is set (S759). The prefetch command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 in the same manner as the process of S755, and is executed in S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) to be executed next. This prefetch command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

  In the process of S759, as in the case of the process of S754, when the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is set. Without performing, the process proceeds to S760. Whether or not the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 203e5 of the second prefetch execution area 203e indicates 0 or a negative value is confirmed not only in the process of S759 but also in the processes of S757 to S759. It may be performed at any time. When the number of times of prefetching suspension shows 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S760.

  After that, the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is set to OFF (S755), and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are in the pre-reading processing or are waiting to start execution of the pre-reading processing are stored in the second pre-reading execution area 203e. If not, the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S756, if it is determined that the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g is not on, that is, is off (S756: No), the execution of the prefetch processing is started in the second prefetch execution area 203e. This means that the values of the waiting counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are not stored. Therefore, the prefetching process for the second prefetching execution area 203e in S757 to S759 is skipped, and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, when the main prefetch processing is executed by the MPU 201, the prefetch execution area (the first prefetch execution area 203d, which corresponds to the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f or the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g set to ON. The respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read from the second pre-reading execution area 203e), and the results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination are predicted. Then, from the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, a prefetch command including information on the prefetch pending frequency stored in the prefetch pending frequency storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 is set, and the prefetch command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. It

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) are temporarily set to the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area. Based on each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e after being stored in one of the prefetch execution areas 203e, in the main processing, This prefetching process is executed regardless of the time interval in which the timer interrupt process is executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is one of the timer interruption processing executed prior to the main processing, in the variation start processing (see FIG. 21). Run in

  Here, like a conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the variation effect, the pre-reading is performed by using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are held by the starting prize detected after the starting prize corresponding to the variation effect. If it is processed, the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the look-ahead at the time of winning the start is predicted, the game is played as described above. There is a risk that the game will be affected due to a delay in the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the prefetching process is executed in the prefetching process, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is one of the processes of the timer interruption process. It is configured to be executed in the start process (see FIG. 21). As a result, even if the prefetching process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the prefetching process is continuously executed after the end of the timer interrupt process, the prefetching process can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the prefetching process is executed using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning for the first entrance 64 is detected. While predicting the result of the big hit lottery or the like, the big hit lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, so that the game can be normally controlled.

  In this prefetching process, the first prefetching in-progress flag 203f and the second prefetching in-progress flag 203g are referred to in one main process, and if both flags are on, the first prefetching execution storage area Reference is made to both 203d and the second prefetch execution storage area 203e, and prefetch is executed for each. As a result, it is possible to execute prefetching earlier in comparison with the case where prefetching is performed by referring to only one of the prefetch execution storage areas in one prefetching process. Therefore, prefetching can be executed for more values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed.

  In the prefetch process in the present embodiment, the first prefetch flag 203f is first referenced (S751), and if it is on (S751: Yes), it is stored in the first prefetch execution storage area 203d. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read (S752 to S755), and then the second pre-reading processing flag 203g is referred to (S756). If it is on (S756: Yes), the second pre-reading execution is performed. The case has been described in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage area 203e are prefetched (S757 to S760), but before the actual prefetching (processing corresponding to S752 to S755 and S757 to S760) is executed. , The first pre-reading processing flag 203f and the second pre-reading processing flag 203g are both referred to and are in the ON state. Each counter C1~C3 from prefetch execution area corresponding to the processing flag read, read ahead the value of CS1, may be a process corresponding to S752～S755.

  In this case, when it is determined that both the first prefetch processing in progress flag 203f and the second prefetch processing in progress flag 203g are in the ON state, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first prefetch execution storage area 203d. Pre-reading and the pre-reading of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pre-reading execution storage area 203e may be performed simultaneously in parallel.

  For example, the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first per random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first prefetch execution storage area 203d and the first per random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second prefetch execution storage area 203e. A process of reading the first hit random number counter C1 in advance and then reading the hit value of 1 from the ROM 202, and comparing the read hit value with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 in each prefetch execution storage area. The processing to be performed may be repeatedly executed until it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 in at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas is a big hit.

  Further, the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first prefetch execution storage area 203d and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second prefetch execution storage area 203e. The process of reading the determination value for reading the variation pattern from the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D, the read determination value, and the variation type counter of each prefetch execution storage area are read in advance. The process of comparing the value of CS1 with the value of CS1 may be repeatedly executed until the variation type is determined for the variation type counter CS1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas.

  Furthermore, in other prediction predictions based on pre-reading, such as predictions of jackpot type judgments and predictions of stop type determinations at the time of deviation, similar to the fluctuation pattern determination, the first pre-reading execution storage area 203d and the second The values of the corresponding counters are read in advance from the prefetch execution storage area 203e, and then the process of reading the judgment value and the process of comparing the read judgment value with the counter value of each prefetch execution storage area are performed. It may be repeatedly executed until the prediction of determination is completed for at least one of the counter values in the prefetch execution storage area.

  As a result, it is necessary to read the winning value and the determination value separately for the prefetch for the first prefetch execution storage area 203d and the prefetch for the second prefetch execution storage area 203e to predict the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern. Therefore, the number of times of reading the hit value and the judgment value can be reduced, and the pre-reading process can be speeded up.

  In this case, for example, after the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas is determined to be a big hit, the first hit random number counter C1 of the remaining prefetch execution storage areas that are not determined to be a big hit. Only for, the prediction processing of the jackpot lottery may be continuously executed. Similarly, with respect to the counter value of at least one prefetch execution storage area, after the prediction of the determination of one is completed, only for the counter value of the remaining prefetch execution storage area for which the prediction of the determination is not completed, The prediction process of the one determination may be continuously executed. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the big hit lottery or the prediction of the judgment has been completed is not compared with the hit value or the judgment value, so that the waste of the processing can be omitted and the prefetch processing can be further speeded up. You can

  On the other hand, for example, even after the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one of the prefetch execution storage areas is determined to be a big hit, the big hit lottery is selected for the first hit random number counters C1 of the two prefetch execution storage areas. The prediction process may be continuously executed. Similarly, even after the prediction of one determination is completed with respect to the counter value of at least one prefetch execution storage area, the prediction processing of the one determination is performed with respect to the counter values of the two prefetch execution storage areas. It may be executed continuously. As a result, although there is a possibility that the processing may be wasted, it is determined whether the prediction of the jackpot lottery or the prediction of the determination has been completed for any of the prefetch execution storage areas, and the prefetch execution storage area used for the prediction is changed. Since the process is unnecessary, the process can be simplified. Therefore, the increase in the capacity associated with the control program due to the prefetching process can be suppressed to be small.

  Returning to FIG. 24, the description of the main process will be continued. In the main process, when the pre-reading process of S701 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S702). Then, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S702: No), the power outage monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power outage signal SG1 and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous prefetching process (S703), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S703: Yes), the process proceeds to S701, and the prefetch process is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the previous prefetching process (S703: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next prefetching process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S704, S705).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S704). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S108 (S705), and the process proceeds to S702.

  Here, since the execution time of the prefetch process of S701 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next prefetch process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S702, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S702: Yes), the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S706 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S706), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S707). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S708), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S709), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S702 is executed at the timing when the prefetch processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S701 ends or the one cycle of the processing of S704 and S705 performed within the remaining time ends. There is. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S701 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the prefetch process (S701) is executed as the process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 has been described, but further other processes are executed. It may be configured to do so. For example, in the present embodiment, executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), large opening opening / closing process (S103), second symbol control process (S105). ) And a part of or all of the switch reading process (S106) may be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the prefetch process (S701) is not executed every 4 ms in the main process, but the remaining time until the next timing at which the process executed every 4 ms is to be executed in the main process is executed. It may be configured to execute the prefetching process. That is, the prefetch processing may be performed at any timing after the negative determination is made in the processing of S703, through the processing of S704, S705, and S702, and then returning to the processing of S703. By executing the prefetching process within the remaining period, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in accordance with the detection of the start winning are the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second in the start winning process (see FIG. 19). The fact that the data is stored in the prefetch execution area 203e can be determined earlier in the main processing. Therefore, it is possible to predict the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination result by the pre-reading process earlier, so that the actual lottery is first performed based on each counter value of the pre-reading target during the pre-reading process. can do.

  If the prefetch processing is not executed every 4 milliseconds and there is no processing to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing, the processing of S703 is omitted and the processing of S701 to S705 is repeatedly executed. It may be configured to. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but the execution time of the prefetching process changes according to the state of the game, so the timer interrupt process for updating the first per random number counter C1 and the second per random number counter C2 is performed. With respect to the execution interval (4 milliseconds in this embodiment), the time at which the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, even in this case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the variation time. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. it can.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-on processing of S917 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the current startup processing (see FIG. 27). ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S914 in FIG. 27), it executes the power-off process in S917. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S917 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S802: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S917 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, this startup processing is started after the momentary power failure and after the completion of the power-off processing in S917, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S917, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S806). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S917 is executed (see S916 of FIG. 27). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S917 is executed, the process of S808 with the power-off flag being turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S917 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S804 to S806 is followed to the process of S808. This is a case where processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S809, is skipped, the process proceeds to S810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S811), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S809 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are already cleared by the process of S804 when the process of S808 is performed through the processes of S804 to S806. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S901 was executed last time (S901), 1 ms If the above has not passed (S901: No), the process proceeds to S912 without performing S902 to S911. In the processing of S901, it is the processing related to display (effect) in S902 to S911 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the variable display process of S912 and the command determination process of S913 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S913 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S912 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S903 to S913 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S909 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to the processing of S905 without performing the notification by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S906). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114. In the retained quantity display updating process, a process of turning on the retaining lamp 285 according to the value of the retaining ball number counter 223a is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S907). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the rear image change to the display control device 114 is performed. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S907 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process ends, the vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S908). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S951), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 27).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S952: Yes), it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated, and the audio output device 226 is set to output an alarm sound (S953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the occurrence of a vibration error is set to the control device 114 (S954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 27). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of displaying an error message image notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  27, the description of the main process is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S908) is completed, then the ramp edit process is executed (S909), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 28) (see S953), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by the sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is output. It is output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S910, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S911), and the process proceeds to S912. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S910 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S912, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. The variable display process, which is the process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S913). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S913 is finished, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S914). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S916), and the power-off process is executed (S917). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S918), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S914 (S914: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S915), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S915: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S915: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the command determination process (S913) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S913). The command determination process (S913) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 27) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. . In addition, this process, when receiving the prefetch command from the main control device 110, stores the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and at the same time, the third symbol display device 81. Decides to start the continuous announcement production. Further, this processing is, when the stop type command is received from the main control device 110, determines the destruction of the command, and when it is recognized that the command is destroyed, switches to the special variation effect as the aspect of the variation effect. Set the stop symbol as a special stop symbol. Details of the command determination process will be described below.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1002), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1003). , Return to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a variation display process (see FIG. 30) described later, a variation pattern for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting a command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S1004). When it is determined that the stop type command is received (S1004: Yes), it is determined whether the special variation flag stored in the RAM 233 is on (S1005). This special variation flag is set to ON when the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination predicted in the look-ahead processing for the variation effect. It is a flag that is set. That is, the special variation flag is set to ON when it is determined that one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. The variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is compared with the prediction result by the pre-reading process. This command determination process detects the reception of the variation pattern command (S1001: Yes), and the variation display process (FIG. 30) is performed. It is performed (see S1104).

  As a result of the determination in S1005, if the special variation flag is on (S1005: Yes), the special variation flag is set to off (S1006), and then the variation pattern command for display indicating the special variation effect as the variation pattern of the variation effect. Is set (S1007). Further, as a stop symbol of the variation effect, a display stop type command indicating a special stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” in order from the left column), the content of the received stop type command Regardless of the setting (S1008), the process returns to the main process.

  Each command set by the processing of S1007 and S1008 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S902).

  As a result of the determination in S1005, if the special variation flag is OFF instead of ON (S1005: No), then the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1009). If the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0th area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is ON, the stop type extracted in the process of S1009 is the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the prefetch information 0 area. It is determined whether or not it matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area (S1010).

  For example, when the stop type extracted in the process of S1009 is “front / back deviation”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information area 0 is “miss”, and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination If is "normal reach", it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the stop type extracted in the process of S1009 is “completely missed”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information No. 0 area is “15R normal jackpot”, or the variation pattern If the prediction result of the judgment is "normal reach", it is judged that they do not match.

  Then, as a result of the determination in S1010, if the stop type matches the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, the display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the stop type extracted in the process of S1010. Is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main process. In the process of S1010, when the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0 area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is off, the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination predicted in the prefetch information 0 area are predicted. Since the result is invalid, the process directly proceeds to S1011 to set the display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the stop type extracted in the process of S1010, and returns to the main process.

  The display stop type command set in the process of S1011 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. .

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1010, if the stop type does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination (S1010: No), one or both of the prefetch command and the stop type command are destroyed. The determination is made, and the process proceeds to S1007. Then, the display variation pattern command indicating the special variation effect is set as the variation pattern of the variation effect (S1007), and further, as the stop symbol of the variation effect, the special stop symbol (for example, “3” “4” from the left column in order). A display stop type command indicating a symbol displayed as "1" is set regardless of the content of the received stop type command (S1008), and the process returns to the main process.

  Then, each command set by the processing of S1007 and S1008 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing of the main processing (S902). It

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the destruction of the command using the result of the prefetching process performed by the main control device 110, and when it is determined that the command has been destroyed, the destruction determination is made. The mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern command or the stop type command is switched to the special variation effect. This special variation effect, as described above, until the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 (command for confirming and displaying the stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect). , Is the effect of displaying the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at high speed. Further, in the special variation effect, a special stop symbol indicating a deviation as a stop symbol (for example, symbols displayed as “3” “4” “1” in order from the left column) is confirmed and displayed in response to the reception of the confirmation command. .

  When it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 is destroyed, the third symbol display device 81 correctly reflects the result of the jackpot lottery performed in the display control device 114, and the variation effect and the stop symbol. Although it may not be possible to perform the confirmation display of, in the pachinko machine 10, a special variation effect is performed in such a case, and a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation after the variation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since it is confirmed and displayed, even if the result of the big hit lottery in the main control device 110 is out of order, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the big hit confirmed display effect.

  Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue playing the game without anxiety. Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in the jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even if the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the prefetching process.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the stop type command match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information No. 0 area. If it does not match, it is determined that one or both of the variation pattern command or the stop type command and the prefetch command are destroyed, and the variation effect mode is switched to the special variation effect. , Also, the case where the stop symbol is set to the special stop symbol has been described, but in addition, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and if it does not match. Either or both of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command It determines that the broken, may be configured to switch the mode of variation effect special variation effect.

  For example, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is "short out" and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is "completely out", it can be determined that these match, and in such a case, the variation The variation pattern and the stop type indicated by the pattern command and the stop type command may be set as they are. On the other hand, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is "short out of bounds" and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is "out of front / rear reach", it can be determined that they do not match. Alternatively, it may be configured to determine that one or both of the variation pattern command and the stop type command are destroyed and switch the mode of the variation effect to the special variation effect.

  The determination as to whether the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command may be made, for example, after an affirmative determination (S1010: Yes) is made in the process of S1010. . Then, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command matches the stop type indicated by the stop type command, the process may proceed to S1011. If not, the process may proceed to S1007.

  As a result of the processing in S1004, when it is determined that the stop type command is not received (S1004: No), it is then determined whether or not the holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command is received (S1012: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, held by the main control device 110). The number of holding balls of the variation effect is extracted and stored in the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1013).

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), every time there is a start prize, the processing of S1014 is executed. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp controller 113 can be matched with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects the start winning. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  After the processing of S1013, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a updated by the processing of S1013 is set (S1014), and the process returns to the main processing. The display reserved sphere number command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the process is executed so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the processing in S1012, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1012: No), it is then determined whether the prefetch command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1015). When it is determined that the prefetch command is received (S1015: Yes), the prefetch included in the prefetch command among the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b (FIG. 9). In the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the area corresponding to the number of holdings, the information showing the jackpot lottery prediction result and the information showing the variation pattern determination prediction result indicated by the prefetch command, respectively, Then, the prefetch information valid flag of the area in which the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are stored is set to ON (S1016).

  For example, when the number of times of pre-reading of the pre-reading command is 4, the big-winning lottery prediction result indicated by the pre-reading command is shown in the big-winning lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the pre-reading information fourth area. The information and the information indicating the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored, and the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information fourth area is set to ON. Similarly, if the prefetch pending count of the prefetch command is one to three times, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the prefetch command is displayed in the prefetch information first to third areas corresponding to the prefetch pending count. The information to be shown and the information to show the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination are stored, and the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information first to third areas in which the information is stored is set to ON.

  Here, since the number of times of pre-reading included in the pre-reading command accurately represents the number of times of holding the variation effect that has been pre-read in main controller 110, the pre-reading information Nos. 1 to 4 are performed by the process of S1016. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination can be surely stored in the area corresponding to the number of times of the pre-processed variation effect suspension. On the other hand, every time the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the variation display process (FIG. 30) displays the read-ahead information first to fourth areas provided in the read-ahead information storage area 223b. A process of shifting the contained data to the respective prefetch information 0th to 3rd areas is executed. As a result, in the prefetch information first to fourth areas, it is possible to always store the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, which are predicted for the variation effects with the number of holdings of 1 to 4 times. In addition, it is possible to store the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command, in the prefetch information No. 0 area.

  Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 executes the process of shifting each data of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b upon receiving the variation pattern command, the voice pattern controller 113 executes The variation pattern of the variation effect shown is compared with the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the variation effect indicated by the information stored in the prefetch information area 0, and they are matched. By determining whether or not to do so, it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from main controller 110 has been destroyed.

  After the processing of S1016, the continuous notice determination processing is executed (S1017). Then, the process returns to the main process. In this continuous notice determination process, the number of pre-reading pending indicated by the pre-reading command, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the pre-reading process, and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination also predicted by the pre-reading process It is determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect for continuously displaying the notice effect images over the variation effects for the starting prize before or before the starting prize that triggered the acquisition of the respective counters C1 to C3, CS1. To do. Further, when the continuous notice effect is performed, is the same notice type continuous notice effect mode in which the same image (for example, “bubble” image) is displayed over a plurality of variable effects as the continuous notice effect mode? , Related images are displayed in order each time a fluctuating effect is performed (for example, each image is displayed in the order of "egg" → "chick" → "chicken" → "chicken group") Step-up type continuous notice effect It decides whether to make it an aspect.

  For example, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is the 15R certainty variation jackpot and the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is any one of the normal reach, super reach, and special reach, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice production is performed. It may be determined that the continuous announcement effect is performed with a predetermined probability of 1. Further, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is wrong and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination is any one of normal reach, super reach, and special reach, the continuous announcement effect is performed with the second predetermined probability. May be determined. Further, in this case, the larger the number of prefetching suspensions, the higher the probability that the continuous announcement effect may be determined.

  In addition to this, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (any one of 15R regular jackpot, 15R probability variation jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot), the continuous announcement effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, if the result of the lottery is wrong, the continuous notice effect may be performed with a predetermined probability only when the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is super reach or special reach. As described above, the condition for determining the continuous announcement effect may be set as appropriate according to the playability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as the continuous notice effect mode, the condition of the same effect type or the step-up type may be appropriately set. For example, a random number counter may be provided inside the voice lamp control device 113, and the continuous notice presentation mode may be determined according to the value of the random number counter.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the main controller 110, based on each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 acquired at the time of starting winning, the prefetching process is executed prior to the timing when the execution of the variation effect is started, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern are selected. Predict the judgment result. Then, these prediction results are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the pre-read command, and the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of variable effects that have been suspended before from the pre-read suspension count included in the pre-read command. From the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination notified by the prefetch command, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is performed for the pending variable effect. Then, in the case of performing the continuous announcement effect, the mode of the continuous announcement effect is determined. As a result, the processing in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the lottery processing in which the game state to be transitioned based on the start winning is drawn. If the MPU 221 having high processing capability is used, it is possible to set various aspects of the continuous notice effect, execution conditions, and the like.

  As a result of the processing in S1015, when it is determined that the prefetch command is not received (S1015: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S1018), and shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the processing of S1018, and once stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

  When the main controller 110 is configured to transmit the prediction state change command, in the process of S1018, when it is determined that the prediction state change command is received, the prefetch information provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b is read. All prefetch information valid flags in the information 0th area to the 4th area may be set to off. As described above, the predicted state change command has a low probability that, in the main controller 110, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the actual jackpot lottery are performed. When only the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to the high-probability state when it was in the state, the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed in the prefetching process performed thereafter. When a high probability state is predicted, or when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both high probability states. , Only the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to the low-probability state, so that the original jackpot in the pre-reading process performed thereafter. If the selection is predicted as a low probability state a state that can be taken of the pachinko machine 10 when carried out, a command sent.

  In such a case, when the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is changed, the prediction result by the look-ahead performed before that is the pachinko machine when the original jackpot lottery is performed. It is highly likely that it was predicted by mistakenly assuming 10 possible states. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 turns off all the prefetch information valid flags of the prefetch information 0th area to the 4th area, which are provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b, based on the reception of the predicted state change command. By setting, it is possible to invalidate all the various prediction results stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b at that time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from performing various controls by pre-reading such as command destruction determination based on an incorrect prediction result.

  Next, the variable display processing (S912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this variable display processing (S912).

  This fluctuation display process (S912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 27) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In order to do so, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and a variation display process that is a process set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 is executed. In addition, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated along with the display of the variation effect, and the display reserved ball number command is set and generated to notify the display controller 114 of the updated reserved ball number. When it is determined to perform the continuous announcement effect for the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display variation pattern command, the continuous announcement command is set after the display variation pattern command.

  Further, in the variation display processing, the variation pattern of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination predicted by the prefetch for the variation effect indicated by the prefetch command. Destruction of the command is performed based on the prediction result of. The details of the variable display process will be described below.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control unit 110. The process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1102), and then the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set. The included data is respectively shifted to the prefetch information areas 0 to 3 (S1103).

  Specifically, first, the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area of the prefetch information first area and the variation pattern determination stored in the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area By storing the information indicating the prediction result and the value of the prefetch information valid flag in the jackpot lottery prediction result storage area, the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area and the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information 0th area, respectively, the prefetch information is stored. The data in the first area is shifted to the prefetch information area 0.

  Then, when the shift of the data to the prefetch information 0th area is completed, the prefetch information 1st area becomes empty, and thus the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information 2nd to 4th areas is stored. , The information indicating the prediction result of the variation pattern determination and the value of the prefetch information valid flag are set to the large hit lottery prediction result storage area and the variation pattern determination prediction result storage area of the prefetch information first to third areas each having a smaller area number 1. And the pre-reading information valid flag, the data in the pre-reading information second to fourth areas are respectively shifted to the pre-reading information first to third areas. Further, the prefetch information fourth area becomes empty, and the information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information fourth area is not valid (that is, invalid). In order to indicate that, the prefetch information valid flag of the prefetch information fourth area is set to OFF.

  When the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, it means that execution of the pending fluctuation effect 1 is started. Specifically, in the main controller 110, a shift process is performed between the pending ball execution area 203c and the pending first to fourth areas of the pending ball storage area 203b, and the counter C1 stored in the pending ball execution area 203c. Based on the respective values of C3 to CS1, the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect are determined.

  Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, by executing the shift process described above between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b each time the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, In each of the prefetch information first to fourth areas, it is possible to store the information indicating the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, which are predicted for the variation effects with the holding numbers of 1 to 4 each time. Information indicating the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination predicted for the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command can be stored in the prefetch information No. 0 area.

  Therefore, after the voice lamp control device 113 has executed the process of shifting each data of the prefetch information Nos. 0 to 4 provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b by the processing of S1103 triggered by the reception of the variation pattern command. In the subsequent processing of S1104 and S1105, the jackpot lottery predicted by the look-ahead for the change pattern of the change effect indicated by the change pattern command and the change effect indicated by the information stored in the look-ahead information No. 0 area and By comparing the predicted results of the fluctuation pattern determination and determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether the command received from main controller 110 is destroyed.

  In the process of S1104, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the process of S1003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1104). Then, if the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0th area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is ON, the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 stores the jackpot lottery prediction result of the prefetch information 0 area. It is determined whether the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the area and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation pattern determination prediction result storage area match (S1105).

  For example, when the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is "various normal reach various", the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information No. 0 area is "misalignment", and variation pattern determination prediction If the result is "normal reach", it is determined that they match. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104 is “out of range”, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery stored in the prefetch information area 0 is “15R normal jackpot”, or the variation If the predicted result of the pattern determination is "normal reach", it is determined that they do not match.

  Then, as a result of the determination in S1105, if the variation pattern type matches the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination, the variation for display for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1104. A pattern command is set (S1106), and the process proceeds to S1108. In the process of S1105, when the prefetch information valid flag provided in the prefetch information 0 area of the prefetch information storage area 223b is OFF, the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination stored in the prefetch information 0 area are predicted. Since the result is invalid, the process directly proceeds to S1106, the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 113 of the variation pattern type extracted at S1104 is set, and the process proceeds to S1108. To do.

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1106 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. . In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1105, if the variation pattern type does not match the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination (S1105: No), one or both of the prefetch command and the variation pattern command are destroyed. Then, the special variation flag provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1107), and the process proceeds to S1108. As a result, in the command determination process (FIG. 29) described above, when the reception of the stop type command is detected (S1004: Yes), an affirmative determination is made by the process of S1005, and the special variation is the variation pattern of the variation effect. A variation pattern command for display indicating an effect is set (S1007), and as a stop symbol of the variation effect, a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3" "4" "1" in order from the left column) is displayed. The display stop type command shown is set regardless of the content of the received stop type command.

  Therefore, the special variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device, and the special stop symbol indicating the special deviation is confirmed and displayed after the variation display. Therefore, even if the jackpot lottery result in the main control device 110 is out, By the destruction of the command, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the jackpot confirmed display effect. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the original jackpot lottery result in the main controller 110 is a jackpot, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. Therefore, the player can continue playing the game without anxiety. Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in the jackpot state even if the confirmation display is off. Even if the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can perform more various controls by performing the prefetching process.

  In the process of S1108, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is adjusted according to the fact that the hold ball is consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the hold ball is set) in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command. Is decremented by 1 (S1108), and a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the value of the updated reserved ball counter 223a is set (S1109). The display reserved sphere number command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Then, the display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of holding sphere numbers corresponding to the number of holding spheres indicated by the display holding sphere number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the held balls by counting the number of the held ball symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is determined to perform the continuous notice presentation by the processing of S1017 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 29) for the variation presentation corresponding to the display variation pattern command set by the processing of S1106. (S1110) If it is determined that the continuous announcement effect has been made (S1110: Yes), the continuous announcement command for notifying the execution of the continuous announcement effect is set to the display control device 114 (S1111). , Return to the main processing. On the other hand, in the process of S1110, when the decision to perform the continuous announcement effect has not been made (S1110: No), the process directly returns to the main process. If the display variation pattern command is not set because the negative determination is made in the processing of S1105 and the special variation flag is turned on, the negative determination is made in the processing of S1110 regardless of the presence or absence of the continuous announcement effect. Perform and return to the main processing as it is. Thereby, because the command is destroyed, it is possible to prevent the continuous dry production from being performed for the variation effect in which the variation pattern or the stop type of the symbol is unclear, and only the special variation effect is provided by the third symbol display device. 81 can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention only to the special variation effect. Further, in such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from having an unnecessary expectation by performing the continuous notice presentation.

  The continuous notice command set by the processing of S1111 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing.

  Here, the continuous notice command set by the process of S1111 is additionally displayed with respect to the variable effect according to the continuous notice effect mode determined by the process of S1017 of the command determination process (see FIG. 29). The type of continuous notice image (any one of “bubble”, “egg”, “chick”, “chicken” and “chicken group”) is included. When the display control device 114 receives the continuous announcement command, the variation effect performed based on the previously received variation pattern command for display is added to the continuous announcement image of the type indicated by the continuous announcement effect command, and the third symbol is added. The process is executed so that the display device 81 displays it.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231, and the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1201), and various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed so that the display control device 114 can be executed. To start. Here, the boot process (S1201) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are stored by providing a dedicated program ROM (for example, the ROM 22 of Patent Document 1 described above) like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, it is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1211). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1211.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1212, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1212, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S1213). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1201 in FIG. 31). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1202 in FIG. 31) (S1215), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  In this way, by executing the boot process (S1201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1211 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1211 is not limited to this, but the boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S1212. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further commands the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The processing for setting the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1213 to S1215 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1211, further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this transfer, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. A process of setting the start address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1211. Alternatively, the processing of S1213 to S1215 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1212 and S1212.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1213 to S1215 without performing the processes of S1211 and S1212. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Returning to FIG. 31, the description will be continued. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1202). Specifically, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and an initial value is set to each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation has started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction to generate the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1203, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1204). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1204, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S1205). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 43A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to transfer the image is executed (see S2002 in FIG. 43A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is kept on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, during this period, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B). The determination process (see S1408 in FIG. 33B) and the simple display setting process (see S1409 in FIG. 33B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 314 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily confirm the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the starting winning prize by the simple change effect. it can.

  In addition, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed at the time of turning on the power. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S1205, the interrupt permission is set (S1206), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1206, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1301), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S1401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S1401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S1402) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1403) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S1402), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. When the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. If the continuous notice command is stored, the continuous notice additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined, the fluctuation pattern command for display, the stop type command, the continuous notice command, etc. are likely to be stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. . Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variation effect or the continuous notice effect selected by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect image according to the mode. It is possible to control drawing of the image so that the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 38.

  In the display setting process (S1403), in the third symbol display device 81, based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S1402) and the like. The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S1404). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 that is specified by the display setting process (S1403) or the simple display setting process (S1409). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S1405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233b is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. A transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set. Further, when the simple image display flag 233b is off and a continuous advance notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the continuous advance notice image used in the continuous advance notice effect is displayed to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of 1) or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S1406). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S1404), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405). , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1407). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability jackpot, 2R probability jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front / rear outreach, other than front / rear) The stop type table corresponding to (reach, complete disengagement) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the simple image display flag is ON (S1401: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. , In order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 11 on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S1408) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S1409) is executed, and the process of S1404 is executed. Move to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 38, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S1402) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S1501: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1502), and then, The type of each unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S1503).

  Then, first of all the unprocessed commands, it is determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command (S1504), and if there is a display reserved ball number command (S1504: Yes), the reserved ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S1505), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the number of reserved balls command processing (S1505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, a new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S1601). The display reserved series command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting processing (S1403) that the display reserved ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the reserved sphere number information included in the display reserved sphere number command is acquired (S1602). In the process of S1602, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the last stored display reserved ball number command. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of retained balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of retained balls acquired in the process of S1602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of retained balls are turned off. (S1603), the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the new holding sphere number command flag is turned on, the number-of-holding-balls pattern corresponding to the number-of-holding-balls corresponding to the number-of-holding-number flag set to be ON is referred to by referring to the number determination flag. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1504 that there is no display reserved ball number command (S1504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display commit command among unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S1506) (S1506: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S1507) and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, details of the confirmation command process (S1507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. The confirmation command process is a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command processing (S1507), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2611), and this processing ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1403) that the display confirmation command is received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . Moreover, after the display setting of the variable effect is processed, if the finalized command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect is passed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the display setting process is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1506 that there is no display confirmation command (S1506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S1508) (S1508: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S1509) and the process returns to S1501.

  Details of the demo command process (S1509) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 35C is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the demo command processing (S1509), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1621). Next, Null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233e to clear its contents, and Null data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear its contents (S1622).

  In the demonstration display data table, since it is not necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, a corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b. Therefore, by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233f by the processing of S1622, it may be possible to indicate that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer while the image is drawn by the demonstration display data table. it can.

  Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the clock counter 233i (S1623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1624). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demo display flag is set to ON, the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S1625), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demo display flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the ON state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233g initialized by the process of S1624 is updated, while the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S1621 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect specified by the demonstration display data table is measured using the time counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S1623, and the process of S1625. Based on the states of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by the above, when the demonstration effect in the demonstration display data table is determined to be finished by the time measurement of the display setting control time counter 233i, the effect to be displayed next As a control, the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Further, when both the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, the above-described confirmation command processing (S1507) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Although it is set, the demo command process (S1509) is then executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S1625.

  Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without the fixed display effect. Since the main control device 110 is configured to transmit the demo command unless the start timing of the fluctuating effect is reached after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command, the main control device 110 would normally be At the start of execution of the command determination process, it is impossible that the commit command and the demo command are both stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, if all of these commands are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, it is highly possible that the commands are not transmitted and received normally. In such a case, the display control device 114 preferentially displays the demonstration effect not directly related to the game on the third symbol display device 81, so that an erroneous fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the result of the game. In addition, the demonstration effect is started without the fixed display effect, so that the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a person related to the hall to request a countermeasure.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1508 that there is no display demo command (S1508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S1510), if there is a display variation pattern command (S1510: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S1511), and the processing returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S1511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S1631). When the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is the special variation effect, the special variation effect display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S1631, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a display data table for change corresponding to a change pattern having a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, the change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is the main control. When instructed by the device 110, while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern having the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the main control device 110 has instructed a fluctuating effect having a fluctuating time, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 is issued. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as part of the variable effect. , Until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed, it is possible to continue watching the fluctuation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 without a feeling of strangeness.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S1631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S1632). Then, the Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S1633).

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S1631, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233i (S1634). . Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1635), and the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S16376).

  By setting the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag to OFF, it is possible to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration effect or the confirmation display effect being displayed. Further, when both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination processing, the above-described confirmation command processing (S1507) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is executed. Is set to ON, then this variation pattern command processing (S1511) is executed, and the determination command flag is turned OFF by the processing of S1625.

  When the process of S1636 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S1637), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233g initialized by the processing of S1635 is updated, while the display data table for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S1631. From the drawing, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Further, the transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by the processing of S1632, and the sprite required in the set display data table for fluctuation is created. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the display setting process, the time counter 233i for which the variation time data is set in the process of S1635 is used to measure the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. When it is determined that the process is finished, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variable effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is given priority, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence / absence of the display commit command is determined first, the commit command process that is a process corresponding to the display commit command is always executed first, while The process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and like the process of S1637, the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be set to OFF by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is given priority, Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, since the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, the demo command process that is the process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first, while the display command is always displayed first. The processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and like the processing of S1631, the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demonstration command is overwritten to the display data table for variation. You can Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demonstration command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with priority.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1510 that there is no display variation pattern command (S1510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S1512: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S1513), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S1513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front-rear reach, non-front-reach reach, complete detachment, special stop symbol ) Is determined (S1641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S1642).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S1642 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S1643), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the process of S1642 Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S1404), after the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S1642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S1643, and the specification thereof is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S1641, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S1642. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even if it is completely disengaged.

  Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually out. However, there is a possibility that the player misunderstands that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in fact, if it is a big hit, the complete disengaged stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the big hit state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1512 that there is no display stop type command (S1512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a continuous notice command among unprocessed commands ( S1514), if there is a continuous notice command (S1514: Yes), the continuous notice command process is executed (S1515), and the process returns to S1501.

  Now, with reference to FIG. 37A, the details of the continuous notice command process (S1515) will be described. FIG. 37 (a) is a flowchart showing the continuous notice command processing. This continuous advance notice command process executes a process corresponding to the continuous advance notice command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the consecutive notice command processing, first, a new consecutive notice command flag for notifying the transfer setting processing (S1405) that the consecutive notice command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1651). Then, the additional data table for continuous notice corresponding to the continuous notice image type (one of "bubble", "egg", "chick", "chicken" and "chicken group") indicated by the continuous notice command is determined. The determined additional data table for continuous notice is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Thus, in the display setting process, for the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the continuous notice corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S1652. The display content of the image for the next one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the notice effect is additionally displayed.

  After that, among the continuous notice image determination flags provided for each continuous notice image type, the continuous notice determination flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type included in the continuous notice command is turned on, and the continuous notice image types corresponding to other continuous notice image types are turned on. The notice determination flag is set to OFF (S1653), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the new consecutive notice command flag set in the process of S1651 is turned on, it is determined that the predetermined notice additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e by the consecutive notice command process. The determination is made, and the continuous notice type corresponding to the continuous notice additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e is specified from the continuous notice determination flag set by the processing of S1653. Then, the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data necessary to display the specified continuous notice type.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1514 that there is no continuous advance notice command (S1514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S1516). ), If there is a back image change command (S1516: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S1517), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S1517) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag that notifies the transfer setting process (S1405) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S1661). Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S1662), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S1661 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set by the process of S1662. When the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S1662 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident type) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, there is no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously interpreted as a back image change command. There is also a risk that In the process of S1662, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1516 that there is no back image change command (S1516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a frame button operation command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a frame button operation command (S1518) (S1518: Yes), a frame button operation command process is executed (S1519), and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, details of the frame button operation command process (S1519) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the frame button operation command processing. The frame button operation command process is to execute a process corresponding to the frame button operation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the frame button operation command, the frame button operation flag indicating that the frame button has been operated in the ON state is set to ON (S1671), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, based on the frame button operation flag set by the process of S1671, the frame button was operated while the super reach selection screen was displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variable display data table. When is detected, a process for updating the type of super reach to be displayed later is executed. This allows the player to select a desired super reach effect.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined in the process of S1518 that there is no frame button operation command (S1518: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S1520). If there is an error command (S1520: Yes), the error command process is executed (S1521) and the process returns to S1501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S1521) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S1681). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S1682), and the command determination is performed. Return to processing.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S1681, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S1682, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S1682 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the hall person can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Returning to FIG. 34, if it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S1520 (S1520: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S1522) and the process returns to S1501.

  In the processing of S1501 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1501: Yes). ), And the processes of S1502 to S1522 are executed again. Then, the processing of S1501 to S1522 is repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the processing of S1501 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S1408) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 11, that is, the display table confirmation command and the display variation pattern are displayed. Only the command and the stop type command for display are extracted, and the process corresponding to each command is the fixed command process (see FIG. 35B), the fluctuation pattern command process (see FIG. 36A), and the stop type. The command process (see FIG. 36B) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 36A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S1631. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S1632, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39 to FIG. 42, details of the above-described display setting process (S1403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIGS. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S1701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S1701: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S1702 to S1708 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S1701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S1702), and then S1703 to S1708. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S1703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved sphere number command flag is on (S1703), and if the new reserved sphere number command flag is on (S1703: Yes), it is displayed in the previous command determination process. When it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls is processed, the reserved image setting process is executed (S1704).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41A, the details of the reserved image setting process will be described. FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting process. This hold image setting process causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls notified from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the fact that the display holding ball number command is processed. Therefore, it is a process for expanding the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag that is set to ON is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The reserved image data to be displayed in () is expanded (S1751). In the task process, based on this expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are drawn. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the pending image setting process, after the process of S1751, the new pending ball number command is set to OFF (S1752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the reserved image setting process (S1704) or in the process of S1703, if it is determined that the new reserved sphere number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S1703: No), then Then, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S1705). If the error occurrence flag is on (S1705: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S1706).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set In order to display the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81, the warning image data is expanded (S1761).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S1761, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S1762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the warning image setting process (S1706) or in the process of S1705, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S1705: No), then the frame button It is determined whether the operation flag is on (S1707). If the frame button operation flag is on (S1707: Yes), the frame button operation process is executed (S1708).

  Here, details of the frame button operation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the frame button operation processing. In this process, when the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen for selecting the display mode of the super reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the super reach to be displayed according to the operation is displayed. This is a process for selecting a mode.

  In the frame button operation process, first, after setting the frame button operation flag to OFF (S1771), it is determined whether or not the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772). This super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Based on the variation display data table that has been set, the previously executed V In the interrupt process, when the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the sprite for the super reach selection screen, it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, in the process of S1772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772: No), the frame button operation process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1772, if it is determined that the super reach selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1772: Ye), the super reach type flag provided for each display mode of the super reach is set. After updating (S1773), the process returns to the display setting process. In order to update the super-reach type, only the super-reach type flag corresponding to one display mode is turned on and the other super-reach type flags are turned off so that a plurality of super-reach display modes are selected in a predetermined order. Set to.

  In the present embodiment, when defining the display of the super reach of the mode selected by the player in the display data table for variation, the drawing content corresponding to the display mode of each super reach is defined for each address. There is. Then, in the display setting process, when the contents of the display data table are expanded in the process of S1710 to be described later, only the drawing contents corresponding to the display mode of the super reach in which the super reach type flag is turned on are extracted. As a result, in the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) corresponding to the display mode of the selected super reach is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle. Since various parameters are set, the super reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the selected display mode.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the frame button operation process (S1708) or in the process of S1707, when it is determined that the frame button operation flag is not on, that is, it is off (S1707: No), then S1709. Process shifts to.

  In S1709, pointer update processing is executed (S1709). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pointer updating process. This pointer updating process is performed by the corresponding drawing content or transfer from the display data table, the additional data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f. This is a process of updating the pointer 233g that specifies the address at which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233g (S1781). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233g is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value of each of the pointers 0001H is sequentially changed from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233g is updated by the processing of S1781, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Is determined (S1782). As a result, if it is End information (S1782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table or the restart display data table (S1783), and the demo display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S1783: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S1784), and further it corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the clock counter 233i (S1785), and the process proceeds to S1787. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demonstration effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1783, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (S1783: No), the pointer 233g The value is subtracted by 1 (S1786), and the process proceeds to S1787. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, the variable display data table or the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, , The drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  When it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d as a result of the processing in S1782 that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233g after the update in the processing in S1781 is not End information (S1782: No). ), The process of S1783 to S1786 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1787.

  In the process of S1787, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is ON (S1787), and if the confirmation command flag is OFF instead of ON (S1787: No), the pointer updating process is terminated and the display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1787: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, and therefore the display data table buffer. The value of the pointer 233g is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233d (S1788), and the value of the clock counter is set to 1. (S1789), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table can be expanded and the start of the confirmed display effect can be controlled.

  Returning to FIG. 39, after the pointer update processing, the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e are used to change the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the pointer update processing. The drawing contents are expanded (S1710). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) forming the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S1710 together with the pending image and the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite. , Various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined. In addition, when Null data is described in the additional data table, it is assumed that there is no sprite to be added, and the subsequent processing is executed. When the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared with Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233e.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233i is subtracted by 1 (S1711), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S1712). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233i is 1 or more (S1712: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process is returned to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233i is 0 or less (S1712: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final control command is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect (display final command). ) Is to be transmitted, it is confirmed in the subsequent processing of S1713 whether the confirmation command flag is ON (S1713).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1713: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, so stop first. The mode of the fixed display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, and the fixed display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are set. Null data is written in each and the contents thereof are cleared (S1714). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the fixed display is set in the clock counter 233i (S1715), and the value of the pointer 233g is further initialized to 0 (S1716). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S1717), and then the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1718), and the content of the stop symbol determination flag is kept as it is in the work RAM 233. Is copied to the previously stopped symbol determination flag provided in (S1719), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, in the case where the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the confirmation command (display confirmation) is issued from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113 in accordance with the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S1719 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is started from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, so in the variation display data table, variation based on the data table is started. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is defined until a predetermined time has elapsed since it was performed. In the task process (S1404), the stop symbol in the previous variable effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S1719 until a predetermined time elapses after the variation is started. Then, for the identified stop symbol, the symbol offset information defined in the display data table for variation is added to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1713, if the confirmation command flag is OFF instead of ON (S1713: No), the process proceeds to S1720 shown in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is ON (S1720). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S1720: Yes), the determination result in the process of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. After that (S1721), the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S1722), and then time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the clock counter 233i (S1723). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S1724), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1725), and the V interrupt processing is ended.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the fixed display effect ends, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  It is to be noted that the branch condition of S1720: Yes is satisfied when the fixed display effect is performed, and in this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are processed by the processing of S1714. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S1722, the clearing process of those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S1720, if the confirmed display flag is not on but is off (S1720: No), then it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S1726). If the demo display flag is on (S1726: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S1712 (S1712: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended and V Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1726, when the demo display flag is not on but on (S1726: No), the determination result (S1712: Yes) in the process of S1712 means that the variable effect has ended. Therefore, when the confirmation command is not received within a predetermined time after the variation effect is finished, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d in order to start the restart effect. In response to this, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S1727), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value (S1728).

  Then, when the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S1728: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S1728: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and Null data is set in each of the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f. Are written to clear their contents (S1729). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233i (S1730), the value of the pointer 233g is further initialized to 0 (S1731), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, in the display control device 114, a confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed due to the end of the variation effect. When the (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect for displaying the image in which the third symbol is vibrated on the third symbol display device 81, so the player uses the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually observing that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the fluctuation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update processing described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a mode of vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing content required to be displayed by rocking at least once is specified. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, by making the restart effect the effect that the third symbol display device 81 vibrates and displays the third symbol, the restart display data table is swung the third symbol at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the drawing content necessary for displaying, it is possible to reduce the capacity required for storing the restart display data table.

  Further, when the display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S1714 shown in FIG. 83 is performed and the display data table buffer is executed. A confirmation display data table is set in 233d. As a result, even during the restart effect, in response to the reception of the display confirmation command, the stop display of the third symbol is performed by the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag, and the final display effect is the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed on.

  Further, when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the processing of S1631 of FIG. The display data table for fluctuation is set in the table buffer 233d, and the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the display demonstration command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S1621 of FIG. 35C is performed, and the display data table is displayed. The display data table for demonstration is set in the buffer 233d, and the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The restart effect does not receive the finalizing command (display finalizing command) from the main control device 110, which should be originally received, even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Since the effect is displayed in some cases, the confirmation command may not be received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The simple display setting process (S1409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, For a predetermined time, it is defined that one of the power-on fluctuation images (one of FIG. 11 (b) and (c)) corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. In addition, after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) to be originally received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is not accepted. The process of setting the display data table that defines restarting the variation effect of the variation image at power-on in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, details of the transfer setting process (S1405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2001: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S2002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the image controller 237 is set with a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2001, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S2001: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S1603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the image data from the character ROM 234 is transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S2002), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S2002).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is issued to the image controller 237 (S2101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S2101: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S2102). In the process of S2102, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the process of S2102 that the transfer process is not completed (S2102: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to S2103. Further, as a result of the processing of S2101, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S2101: No), the processing proceeds to S2103.

  In the process of S2103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2103). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2104), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, transfer destination information (storage destination information. , The resident video RAM 235) and the transfer destination (the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data transferred here is to be stored) are included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S2103, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S2103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S2105), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S1408 of FIG. 33B) and the simple display setting process (see S1409 of FIG. 33B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 34 to 38) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 39 to 42) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 44) (see S2001: No in FIG. 43A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 282.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S2003) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S1405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S2003).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233g updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by the pointer update process (S1709) of the display setting process (S1403) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S2201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S2202), and if it is transfer data information (S2202: Yes), the transfer target image data (sprite to start transfer from the transfer data information is determined. Of the character ROM 234 in which the image data) is stored, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted, and the work RAM 233 is extracted. The data is stored in the transfer data buffer provided in (S2203). Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205.

  Further, in the process of S2202, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

  In the process of S2205, after the transfer of the image data in the image controller 237 is completed, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 (S2205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S2205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S2206).

  In the process of S2206, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S2206 that the transfer process is not completed (S2206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. Further, as a result of the processing of S2205, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S2205: No), the process proceeds to S2207.

  In the process of S2207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S2207). If the transfer start flag is on (S2207: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S2208), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S2203 is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S2207: No), then it is determined whether or not the new continuous notice command flag is on (S2209).

  If the new continuous notice command flag is on (S2209: Yes), it means that the continuous notice command is processed and the continuous notice additional data table for the continuous notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 733e. Therefore, after the new consecutive notice command flag is set to OFF (S2210), the image data of the consecutive notice image corresponding to the consecutive notice determination flag in the ON state among the consecutive notice determination flags provided for each consecutive notice image type. The start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which is stored and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are specified (S2211), and the specified various types are specified. After setting the image data of the sprite indicated by the information as the transfer target image, The process proceeds to S2216.

  In the process of S2209, if the new continuous notice command flag is not on but on (S2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S2212). Then, if the rear image change flag is not on but on (S2212: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is turned on (S2212: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is turned off (S2213), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer The start address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is specified (S2214), the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various pieces of information is set as the transfer target image, and the process proceeds to S2216.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S2214, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image of the back face A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S2216, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S2216). The determination in the process of S2216 is performed by referring to the stored image determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image is read from the stored image determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite set as the transfer target is stored in the normal video RAM 236. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S2216 (S2216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2216, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S2216: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S2217). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list as the basis. In addition, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (storage destination information, in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination. A start address (a storage destination start address) of (a sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image transferred here) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S2217, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated (S2218), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image to “on” and storing it in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be turned off.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process for the continuous notice command is executed in the previously executed command determination process and corresponds to the continuous notice image indicated by the continuous notice command. When the additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the image data of the continuous notice image used in the additional data table can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to transfer to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. .

  Here, in the transfer data table, so that image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The image of each sprite specified in the data table can be immediately drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, and accordingly, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, details of the above-described drawing process (S1406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S1404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated (S2301). That is, in the processing of S2301, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S1404). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S1405), the start address of the character ROM 234 (transfer source start address) where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (the final address of the storage source), the storage destination information (the information indicating the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) where the transfer target image data should be stored, and the start address (the storage destination address) are added. .

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S2302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  When the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ), Storage destination information (information indicating the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the start address (storage destination start address) at which the transfer target image data should be stored, and the storage source start address is stored. When the image data stored up to the original final address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the storage destination information is in an unused state. Store it in the buffer RAM 237a Image data sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the storage destination head address of the resident video RAM235 or normal video RAM236 indicated by the storage destination information. Then, the image data stored here is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S2302, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S2303). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the plug-in process (see FIG. 33) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame are alternately arranged every 20 milliseconds for the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in addition to the jackpot lottery performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, each counter value acquired and reserved at the time of starting winning is prefetched, A pre-reading process for predicting the result of the jackpot lottery is executed. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the prefetching process in the main process, while executing the jackpot lottery and the like in the timer interrupt process which is preferentially executed over the main process. .

  Here, when the pachinko machine is configured to execute the prefetching process separately from the big hit lottery, the big hit lottery needs to compare the counter value acquired by the start winning and the individual hit value one by one. On the other hand, in the pre-reading process, it is necessary to compare the pre-read value and each winning value one by one separately from the big hit lottery. As a result, particularly when the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the comparison process of the counter value and each hit value is performed in both the big hit lottery and the pre-reading process, for example, when the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value with the winning value in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  In such a situation, as in the conventional gaming machine, at the time of starting the variation effect, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the starting prize detected after the starting prize corresponding to the variation effect. If the pre-reading process is performed using, the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect will be performed before and after, and the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the pre-reading at the time of starting winning will be predicted, which is the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected due to delays in the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

  Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the variation effect and executing the jackpot lottery, and a start winning detection to obtain the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a prefetch process are executed. When configured to include processing, there may be a case where the jackpot lottery processing and the pre-reading processing are both performed in one timer interrupt processing based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . Since each process may take a long processing time as described above, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the prefetching process is executed in the main process, while the jackpot lottery or the like is performed in the timer interrupt process, so that the prefetching process is executed in the main process. Even during the period, since the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt process is executed during the prefetch process, the prefetch process can be surely completed because it is continuously executed after the timer interrupt process is completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed using the value of each counter acquired when the start winning is detected, and the jackpot lottery is predicted while predicting the result of the jackpot lottery or the like. Since it can be performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect without delay, the game can be normally controlled.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the time of winning the start prize are stored in the first prefetch execution area 203d or the second prefetch execution area 203e as well as the reserved ball number storage area 203b. The pre-reading process is executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e.

  Here, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere number storage area 203b are directly read out to perform the prefetching process, when the execution start timing of the variable effect is reached during the prefetching process, as described above. The counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) of the holding ball storage area 203b are shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c or another holding area. As a result, it is necessary to change the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the prefetching process every time the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pre-reading process is executed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e, the fluctuation occurs during the pre-reading process. Even when the effect execution start timing comes and the variation start process is executed, the first pre-reading execution area 203d or the second pre-reading execution area 203e is not changed without changing the storage areas of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be referred to in the pre-reading process. Since it is sufficient to continue to refer to, the processing can be simplified.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with the first prefetch execution storage area 203d and the second prefetch execution storage area 203e, and the counters C1 to C3 acquired at the timing of the start winning. The value of CS1 is stored in the first prefetch execution storage area 203d or the second prefetch execution storage area 203e separately from the reserved sphere storage area 203b, and then stored in the first prefetch execution storage area 203d or the second prefetch execution storage area 203e. A case has been described in which the stored values of the respective counters are pre-read to execute the pre-reading process of predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b at the timing of the start winning are set before the start timing of the variation effect execution. The read-ahead processing is performed by directly reading from the reserved ball storage area 303b and pre-reading to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that the main control device 110 includes a RAM 303 over a RAM 203. Further, the variation process (S109) and the start winning process (S110) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the prefetch process (S703) in the main process (see FIG. 24). ) And part of the processing included in each are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, various processes executed by MPU 211 of payout controller 111, various processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp controller 113, and display controller. Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 46, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with a RAM 303 instead of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Similar to the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, the RAM 303 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202, and includes the reserved ball storage area 203a and the reserved ball storage area. It has at least a 303b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, and a prefetch pending count storage area 303h. Of these, the reserved ball storage area 203a and the reserved ball execution area 203c have the same configuration and function as the reserved ball storage area 203a and the reserved ball execution area 203c in the first embodiment.

  The reserved sphere storage area 303b, like the reserved sphere storage area 203b in the first embodiment, is a first random number counter C1 and a first winning type obtained from a counter buffer (see FIG. 47) in association with the detection of a start winning. This is a memory for storing the respective values of the counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, the details of the reserved ball storage area 303b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship among various counters provided in the RAM 203, the reserved ball storage area 303b, and the reserved ball execution area 203c. The first per random number counter C1, the first per type random counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second per random number counter C4, which are various counters provided in the RAM 203. The 2 initial value random number counter CINI2 has the same configuration and function as each of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, CINI1, C4, CINI2 in the first embodiment, and is stored in the counter buffer which is one area of the RAM 203. It Then, these counters are updated in the same way as in the first embodiment in the timer interrupt process and the main process. Further, when the start winning is detected, among these counters, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the determination of the jackpot type, and the stop symbol at the time of disengagement The stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the variation pattern to be stopped and the variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern to stop the stop symbol at the time of a big hit are read from the counter buffer and stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b. Is stored.

  In the reserved ball storage area 303b, like the reserved ball storage area 203b in the first embodiment, data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning is stored up to four times (reserved). As possible, it has four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read from the counter buffer. Of the four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) that are acquired and provided in the reserved ball storage area 303b, in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth), The acquired counter value is stored.

  In each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), a first per-random number counter storage area 303b1 for storing the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and a first per-type random number counter C2 for storing the value of each per-type counter C2. A per-type classification counter storage area 303b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 303b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 303b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. These counter storage areas 303b1 to 303b4 are a first random number counter storage area 203b1, a first per type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4, respectively, in the first embodiment. It has the same configuration and function.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter storage area 303b1, the first hit type counter storage area 303b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 303b3, and the variation type counter storage area 303b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. Although provided in 303b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and four areas 303b1, 303b2, 303b3, 303b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect has been reached, the same shift processing as that of the first embodiment is performed between the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 303b and the holding ball execution area 203c. To do. As a result, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in each counter storage area 303b1 to 303b4 of the holding first area of the holding ball storage area 203b is stored in each counter of the holding ball execution area 203c. The areas 203c1 to 203c4 are respectively shifted. Then, the MPU 201 refers to the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c in the variation start process (see FIG. 21), performs the jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and changes the corresponding lottery result. Determine the pattern and stop type. On the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The reserved sphere storage area 303b is different from the reserved sphere storage area 203b in the first embodiment in that a prefetch execution flag 303b5 is provided in each of the reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). . The prefetch execution flag 303b5 is a flag indicating whether or not the prefetch process has been executed in the holding area in which the prefetch execution flag 303b5 is provided. In the case of, it indicates that the prefetch processing has not been executed.

  The prefetch execution flag 303b5 is initialized to off in the RAM initialization process (see S613 in FIG. 23) executed when the power is turned on. Further, when storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired at the timing when the ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 is stored in one of the reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 303b, The prefetch execution flag 303b5 of one reservation area storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is set to OFF. This indicates that the prefetching process has not been executed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area. On the other hand, when the pre-reading process of pre-reading the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in one holding area and predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is executed, the pre-reading execution flag 303b5 of the one holding area is set. It is set to ON, which indicates that the prefetch process has been executed.

  When the shift processing is performed between the holding first to fourth areas, the values set in the prefetch execution flags 303b5 of the respective holding second to fourth areas are stored in the other counter storage areas 303b1 to 303b4. The prefetch execution flag 303b of the area (the first to the third) having the smaller area number by 1 is shifted together with the determined value. That is, the value of the readahead execution flag 303b5 of the hold second area is shifted to the readahead execution flag 303b5 of the hold first area, and the value of the readahead execution flag 303b5 of the hold third area is shifted to the readahead execution flag 303b5 of the hold second area. Then, the value of the prefetch execution flag 303b5 of the reserved fourth area is shifted to the prefetch execution flag 303b5 of the reserved third area. In this way, by shifting the value of the prefetch execution flag 303b together with the value of each counter, the prefetch processing is performed on each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each holding area according to the value of the prefetch execution flag 303b. Whether or not it can be accurately indicated.

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c are being used in the jackpot lottery or the like in accordance with the execution start timing of the variable effect, or already in the jackpot lottery or the like. Since it is a value after being used, the prefetching process is not executed for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. Therefore, the prefetch execution flag is not provided for the reserved ball execution area 203c. Therefore, when shifting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the holding first area to the holding ball execution area 203c, the value of the prefetch execution flag 303b5 of the holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c. Processing is not performed.

  In the main process (see FIG. 24), the MPU 201 repeatedly executes the prefetch process described later with reference to FIG. 50, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are suspended in the prefetch process. The prefetch execution flag 303b5 of the holding area is referred to. Then, when there is a pending area where prefetching is not executed, the holding area in which each counter value is reserved first among the unexecuted pending areas, that is, the area number with the highest area number among the pending areas where prefetching is not executed. Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the small holding area is pre-read to predict the result of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination, and the pre-read command for notifying the prediction result to the voice lamp control device 113 (FIG. 8). Execute the pre-reading process to set (see). Then, until it is confirmed that the prefetch processing is executed for all the reserved areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved, the MPU 201 determines whether the preread processing is not executed. The read-ahead process for the reserved area in which each counter value is reserved first is continued. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b are prefetched according to the order of being reserved in the reserved ball storage area 303b, and the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are sequentially obtained. A predictive prefetching process can be executed.

  When the prefetching process is executed in the one holding area, the MPU 201 sets the prefetching execution flag of the one holding area to ON, as described above, to indicate that the prefetching process is executed in the holding area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prefetching process from being executed again for the reserved area.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are suspended by the prefetching process (see FIGS. 24 and 50) repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 in the main process. If there is a holding area for which pre-reading has not been executed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the un-holding area are pre-read for each holding area. Then, the pre-reading process for predicting the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination is executed. In addition, in the second embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is one of the timer interrupt processes executed prior to the main process. It is executed in a certain fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21).

  Here, in addition to the jackpot lottery that is performed at the start of execution of the variable effect, the pachinko machine is executed so as to prefetch each counter value acquired and held at the time of starting winning and predict the result of the jackpot lottery. When configured, in the jackpot lottery, it is necessary to compare the counter value acquired by the starting winning and the individual winning value one by one, and also in the prefetch process, separately from the jackpot lottery, It is necessary to compare each hit value one by one. As a result, particularly when the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, the comparison process of the counter value and each hit value is performed in both the big hit lottery and the pre-reading process, for example, when the number of hit values in the high probability state is 30. For example, it must be repeated up to 30 times. Therefore, it takes a long time to compare the counter value with the winning value in each of the jackpot lottery and the prefetching process.

  In such a situation, as in the conventional gaming machine, at the time of starting the variation effect, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held by the starting prize detected after the starting prize corresponding to the variation effect. If the pre-reading process is performed using, the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variation effect will be performed before and after, and the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the pre-reading at the time of starting winning will be predicted, which is the most in the game. There is a risk that the game will be affected due to delays in the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is an important process.

  Further, in the timer interrupt process, a process of determining the start of the variation effect and executing the jackpot lottery, and a start winning detection to obtain the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and a prefetch process are executed. When configured to include processing, there may be a case where the jackpot lottery processing and the pre-reading processing are both performed in one timer interrupt processing based on the determination of the start of the variable effect and the detection of the start winning. . Since each process may take a long processing time as described above, in this case, all the processes included in the timer interrupt process may not be completed before the next timer interrupt process is started. Can occur. Therefore, various controls required for the game will be delayed, which may affect the game.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, as described above, while the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is interrupted by the timer. It is configured to be executed in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21) which is one of the processes. As a result, even if the prefetching process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, even if the timer interrupt process is executed during the prefetch process, the prefetch process can be surely completed because it is continuously executed after the timer interrupt process is completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is executed by using each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning is detected, and the result of the jackpot lottery or the like is predicted. At the same time, the jackpot lottery can be carried out without delay at the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b at the timing of the start winning are directly read from the reserved ball storage area 303b and prefetched, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern It is configured to execute a prefetching process for predicting the result of the determination. As a result, the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached during the prefetch processing, and when the shift processing is performed between the respective holding first to fourth areas of the holding sphere storage area 303b, the holding area during the preread processing is shifted. However, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 303 as compared with the case where the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. The readahead pending count storage area 303h stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold areas in which the readahead process is being executed among the holding first to fourth areas provided in the holding sphere storage area 303b. This is an area for storing the number of times of holding that is held as a prefetching holding number of times. That is, if the holding area in which the prefetching process is being executed is the holding first area, the number of holdings for which the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding first area are held continuously is one. Therefore, "1" is stored as the prefetch pending count in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h.

  Similarly, if the holding area in which the pre-reading process is being executed is the holding second area, “2” is stored in the pre-reading holding count storage area 303h, and the holding area in which the pre-reading processing is being executed is the holding third area. For example, “3” is stored in the readahead pending frequency storage area 303h, and if the pending area in which the prefetching process is being executed is the reserved fourth area, “4” is stored as the prefetch pending frequency in the prefetch pending frequency storage area 303h. Is stored.

  The pre-reading pending count stored in the pre-reading pending count storage area 303h is included in the pre-reading command generated as a result of the pre-reading process, and together with the prediction result of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation pattern determination, the voice lamp control device. 113 is notified. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the prefetch command can grasp the number of times the variable effect is held according to the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination obtained by the prefetch process.

  Further, the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h is referred to when the MPU 201 executes the prefetch processing, and from the pending area corresponding to the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h, The values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are read out and prefetched to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination.

  Here, the setting of the prefetch reservation number storage area 303h is set in the one preserving area when prefetching each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the one preserving area in the prefetching process. This is performed by storing the number of times of holding of each of the stored counters C1 to C3, CS1 as the number of times of pre-reading in the pre-reading number-of-holds storage area 303h (see S773 in FIG. 50). Further, with the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, as the shift processing is performed between the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 303b, the number of read-ahead holding times stored in the read-ahead holding number storage area 303h Is decremented by 1 (see S321 in FIG. 49).

  Here, when the shift processing is performed between the holding first to fourth areas of the holding sphere storage area 303b, the holding area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored is the area number. 1 Move to a smaller area. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the prefetch pending count in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h is decremented by 1 in accordance with the shift process, so the prefetch pending count in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h is Even when the shift process is performed at the execution start timing of the variable effect during the prefetching process, the number of times each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is held during the prefetching process and the counter value are stored. The reserved area can be indicated accurately.

  Therefore, by including the pre-reading pending count stored in the pre-reading pending count storage area 303h in the pre-reading command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the pre-reading command predicts the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination obtained by the pre-reading process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times the variable effect is held according to the result.

  Further, when executing the prefetching process, the MPU 201 refers to the prefetching pending count storage area 303h, and selects counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the holding area corresponding to the prefetching pending count stored in the prefetching pending count storage area 303h. Even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 303b at the execution start timing of the variation effect during the prefetch process, it is possible to simply read the value of Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process can be prefetched. Therefore, it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift processing is performed in the reserved sphere storage area 303b in the prefetch processing, and thus the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 303b are directly read. Even in the case of prefetching in advance, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

  Next, various kinds of processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment. This start winning process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) executed every 4 milliseconds prior to the main process (FIG. 24) (S110), and the first winning entrance. It is determined whether or not there is a ball to 64 (start prize), and if there is a start prize, a process of storing (holding) the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the hold ball storage area 203b is executed. Is.

  In each of the processing from S201 to S205 of this start winning processing, the same processing as each processing from S201 to S205 of the starting winning processing in the first embodiment is executed. Then, when the process of S205 is completed, in the start winning process of the second embodiment, the process of S221 is executed instead of the processes of S206 to S213 of the starting winning process of the first embodiment.

  In the processing of S221, the prefetch execution flag 303b5 provided in the holding area (one of the holding first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored by the processing of S205 is set to OFF. . After the processing of S221, the start winning processing is ended and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing.

  As described above, the prefetch execution flag 303b5 provided in the holding area (one of the holding first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored by the processing of S205 is set to OFF. With this, it is possible to indicate that the prefetching process is not executed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 newly stored in the one holding area of the holding ball storage area 303b with the start winning. As a result, the MPU 201 performs pre-reading on the newly stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the pre-reading processing (see FIG. 50) to predict the results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination. To do.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a variation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. This fluctuation process is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) executed every 4 milliseconds in preference to the main process (FIG. 24) (S109), and the first symbol display device 37. And controlling the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, each process of S301 to S305 and S310 to S317 is the same as each process of S301 to S305 and S310 to S317 in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the fluctuation process of the second embodiment, when the process of S305 is completed, the process of S321 is executed instead of the processes of S306 to S309 of the fluctuation process of the first embodiment.

  That is, as a result of the determination in S304, the value (holding ball number N) of the holding ball number counter 203a is not 0 (S304: Yes), and it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, and the holding ball number counter 203a determines. When the value (holding ball number N) is subtracted by 1 (S305), the value of the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h is decremented by 1 (S321), and the process proceeds to S310. Then, in the process of S310, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b is subjected to a shift process, and based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the shift process, the first symbol display device 37. And the variation start process for the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S311), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  As described above, in the process of S321, the prefetch hold count storage area 303h is matched with the shift processing being performed between the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 303b with the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect. 1 is subtracted from the prefetch pending count stored in the.

  As described above, when the shift processing is performed between the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 303b, the holding area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored is the area. Move to the area with the smallest number. On the other hand, in the process of S321, the prefetch pending count of the prefetch pending count storage area 303h is decremented by 1 as the shift process is performed. Even when the shift process is performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the number of times each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is held during the prefetching process, or the holding area in which the counter value is stored. Can be shown accurately.

  Therefore, by including the pre-reading pending count stored in the pre-reading pending count storage area 303h in the pre-reading command, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the pre-reading command predicts the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination obtained by the pre-reading process. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times the variable effect is held according to the result.

  Further, when executing the prefetching process, the MPU 201 refers to the prefetching pending count storage area 303h, and selects counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the holding area corresponding to the prefetching pending count stored in the prefetching pending count storage area 303h. Even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 303b at the execution start timing of the variation effect during the prefetch process, it is possible to simply read the value of Each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetching process can be prefetched. Therefore, it is not necessary to recognize whether or not the shift processing is performed in the reserved sphere storage area 303b in the prefetch processing, and thus the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved sphere storage area 303b are directly read. Even in the case of prefetching in advance, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the prefetch processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. This prefetching process is a process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (FIG. 24) (S701), and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in accordance with the detection of the start winning are set. The pre-reading is performed before the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect is referred to, and the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern determination result are predicted in advance.

  In this pre-reading process, first, the pre-reading execution flag 303b5 of each holding area (holding first to fourth areas) in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the holding sphere storage area 303b is referred to. From among the holding areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held, the holding areas for which prefetching has not been executed are extracted (S771). The holding area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held is determined from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a. That is, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is "1", it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved only in the reserved first area, and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is "1". In the case of "2", it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 are reserved in the reserved first and second areas, and in the case of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a being "3", the reserved first If it is determined that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the first to third areas, and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is "4", the counters C1 to C1 in the reserved first to fourth areas. It is determined that the values of C3 and CS1 are reserved. Then, in the processing of S771, the holding areas in which the prefetch execution flag 303b5 of each holding area is OFF are determined as the holding areas for which prefetching has not been executed.

  Next, it is determined from the result of the processing in S771 whether there is a reserved area where prefetching has not been executed (S772). If there is no reserved area where prefetching has not been executed (S772: No), the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if there is a pre-reading unexecuted holding area (S772: Yes), first, the pre-reading unexecuted holding area is the earliest reserved area, that is, pre-reading unexecuted holding area. Of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area having the smallest area number is set as the prefetch holding count in the prefetch holding count storage area 303h (S773).

  As a result, the subsequent pre-reading of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area corresponding to the pre-reading holding number stored in the pre-reading holding number storage area 303h. That is, if the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h is "1", prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the pending first area, and the prefetch pending count storage area is stored. If the number of pre-reading reservations stored in 303h is "2", pre-reading is performed on the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the second holding area, and pre-reading reservation stored in the pre-reading reservation number storage area 303h. If the number of times is "3", the prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved third area, and the number of prefetching reserved stored in the prefetching reserved number storage area 303h is "4". For example, prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved fourth area.

  Here, in the processing of S773, the number of times of holding of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the holding area that was held first among the holding areas where pre-reading has not been executed is set as the number of times of pre-reading in the pre-reading holding number storage area 303h. Since the setting is made, the pre-reading is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area that is held first among the holding areas where the pre-reading has not been executed. As a result, in the prefetching process, the prefetching can be executed in the suspended order, and the prefetching can be performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 with the shortest time until the actual jackpot lottery or the like. .. Therefore, it is possible to prefetch many counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the actual big hit lottery is performed.

  If the timer interrupt process is executed during the prefetching process and the value of the prefetch pending number of the prefetch pending number storage area 303h is decremented by 1 at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the prefetch pending number after the subtraction is performed. The prefetching is performed on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the holding area corresponding to. As described above, when the shift processing is performed between the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 303b, the holding area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch processing are stored is the area. Move to the area with the smallest number. On the other hand, in the pre-reading process, the pre-reading is performed on the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the holding area corresponding to the pre-reading holding count after the subtraction, so that the execution timing of the variable effect is started during the pre-reading process. Even if the shift process is performed in the reserved ball storage area 303b, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 during the prefetch process can be prefetched without any problem even after the shift process.

  Next, from the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the first per random number counter storage area 303d1 of the preserving area (hereinafter referred to as “prefetch target suspension area”) corresponding to the prefetch suspension number of the prefetch suspension number storage area 303h. , The result of the jackpot lottery is predicted (S774). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 in the prefetch target holding area matches a random number value (hit value) that is a big hit, and when it matches with one of the hit values, it is predicted that the big hit is a big hit. To do. Also, if all hit values do not match, it is predicted to be out of alignment.

  The winning value is set according to the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original big hit lottery (big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value. To be done. That is, when the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the prefetched counter value is predicted to be a normal low probability state, the winning value is “7, 307,582 ". On the other hand, if the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed based on the pre-read counter value is predicted to be in the high probability state, the winning value is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ".

  In the process of S774, when the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is predicted to be a jackpot, the jackpot type determination result is predicted by further prefetching the first hit type counter C2 stored in the prefetch target holding area. To do. The prediction of the jackpot type determination result is performed by specifying the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 of the prefetch target holding area according to the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 7A.

  Then, in the process of S774, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery is finally classified into four patterns of “out”, “15R regular jackpot”, “15R probability variation jackpot”, and “2R probability variation jackpot”. .

  In addition, the state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value is a prediction result of the jackpot type determination. Predict based on. That is, if the prediction result of the jackpot type determination is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is high in the prefetch processing performed thereafter. Predict as a stochastic state. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the jackpot type determination is “15R normal jackpot”, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as a low-probability state in the pre-reading process performed thereafter. .

  However, in the second embodiment as well, similar to the first embodiment, the pre-reading process of the counter value corresponding to all the variation effects is not necessarily executed. For example, if the original jackpot lottery is performed before the prefetch processing of the held counter value is performed, the counter value is changed from the reserve sphere storage area 303b to the reserve ball execution area 203c before the prefetch processing is performed. Since it has been shifted to, the prefetch processing is not executed for that counter value. Therefore, only the prediction result of the jackpot type determination in the process of S774 may greatly deviate the prediction of the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed.

  Therefore, also in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in consideration of the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, possible states (modes) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed. Predict. That is, when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both low probability states, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 If only one moves to the high-probability state, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high-probability state in the prefetching process that is performed thereafter. In addition, when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both high probability states, the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 If only the state shifts to the low-probability state, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take at the time when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the low-probability state in the prefetching process to be performed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to more accurately predict the possible state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed.

  As in the first embodiment, when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both low probability states, Only the gaming state of the actual pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to the high-probability state, so that in the prefetching process performed thereafter, the state that the pachinko machine 10 can take when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted as the high-probability state. In the case, or when the actual gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 that is predicted when the original jackpot lottery are performed are both high probability states, Since only the gaming state has transitioned to the low probability state, in the prefetching process to be performed thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 takes the original jackpot lottery If the predicted state as a low probability state, may be transmitted prediction state change command for notifying that the to voice lamp control unit 113. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives this prediction state change command, even if all the prefetch information valid flags of the prefetch information 0th area to the 4th area provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are turned off. Good.

  When the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is changed by the above-described case, the prediction result by the look-ahead performed before that is the pachinko when the original jackpot lottery is performed. There is a high possibility that the state that the machine 10 can take is erroneously predicted. Therefore, when the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is changed in the above-described case, the predicted state change command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 Based on the reception of the predicted state change command, by setting all the prefetch information valid flags of the prefetch information 0th area to the 4th area provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b to off, the prefetch information is set at that time. It is possible to invalidate all the various prediction results stored in the information storage area 223b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from performing various controls by pre-reading such as command destruction determination based on an incorrect prediction result.

  In addition, after transmitting the prediction state change command to the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 uses the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are held in the hold ball storage area 203b at that time to detect the pachinko machine 10. The prefetch process may be executed again based on the correct state that can be taken. Specifically, all the prefetching execution flags 303b5 provided in the respective holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 303b may be set to OFF. Thereby, the pre-reading process is executed on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 held in these areas, based on the correct state that the pachinko machine 10 can take, and the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination are performed. Can be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute more various controls by using more prediction results.

  In the subsequent process of S775, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch target holding area are prefetched to predict the result of the fluctuation pattern determination (S775). Specifically, if the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S774 is a jackpot, based on the jackpot variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7B, various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, various types of special reach, and premium are reached. The prediction result of the jackpot type determination predicted by the process of S774 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the prefetch target holding area from among the reach A to C and 2R variation A to C Predict the variation pattern associated with and.

  If the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted by the process of S774 is out of the range, first, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the prefetch target holding area, The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is predicted from the front / rear outreach, the reach other than the front / rear outreach, and the complete outreach. At this time, similar to the process of S404 of the variation start process (see FIG. 21), it is predicted when the original jackpot lottery (the jackpot lottery performed at the timing of starting the execution of the variation effect) is performed based on the pre-read counter value. Depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 can be in a low-probability state or a high-probability state, tables with different stop pattern selection counter C3 values corresponding to the respective stop types are set.

  Then, based on the predicted stop type, according to the possible state of the pachinko machine predicted when the original jackpot lottery is performed, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table shown in FIG. 7C or FIG. The determination result of the fluctuation pattern is predicted based on any of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern tables shown in (d). That is, when the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be the low probability state in the normal time excluding the short-time state, the deviation (normal) variation shown in FIG. 7C. Based on the pattern table, the predicted stop type and the variation stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d5 of the read-ahead target hold area are selected from among short misalignment, long misalignment, misalignment normal reach, misalignment super reach, and misalignment special reach. A variation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the type counter CS1 is predicted.

  Further, when the possible state of the pachinko machine 10 when the original jackpot lottery is performed is predicted to be a short-time state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, the variation pattern for deviation (probability change) shown in FIG. 7D. Based on the table, the predicted stop type and the change type stored in the change type counter storage area 203d5 of the read-ahead target hold area from among short deviation, long deviation, deviation normal reach, deviation super reach, and deviation special reach A variation pattern at the time of deviation associated with the counter CS1 is predicted.

  In the process of S775, finally, as the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern determination, four patterns of “out”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, “special reach”, “premier reach”, and “2R probability change” are classified. That is, when the predicted fluctuation pattern is “short deviation” or “long deviation”, it is classified as “out”. If the predicted variation pattern is “various normal reach” or “various normal reach”, it is classified as “normal reach”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is "various types of super reach" or "various types of super reach", it is classified as "super reach". If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “various special reach” or “various special reach”, it is classified as “special reach”. If the predicted fluctuation pattern is “premier reach A” to “premier reach C”, it is classified as “premier reach”. When the predicted fluctuation pattern is “2R fluctuation A” to “2R fluctuation C”, it is classified into “2R fluctuation”.

  Then, in the subsequent processing of S776, the prediction result of the jackpot lottery predicted in the processing of S774, the prediction result of the variation pattern determination predicted in the processing of S775, and the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h The pre-reading command shown in FIG. 8 for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S776). The prefetch command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) to be executed next, this prefetch command is the voice lamp control. Sent to the device 113.

  In the process of S776, if the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h indicates 0 or a negative value, the process proceeds to S772 without setting the prefetch command. As described above, this prefetching process is performed independently of the execution interval of the timer interrupt process in the main process. As a result, the timer interrupt process is executed at intervals of 4 milliseconds even while the prefetch process 1 is being executed. Then, in the variation process (FIG. 49), which is one process of the timer interrupt process, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is detected, it is put on hold regardless of whether or not the prefetching process is being executed. The execution of the variable effect is started. Therefore, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are performing the prefetching process, the actual jackpot lottery or the like may occur before the prefetching process is completed.

  Here, when the execution timing of the fluctuating effect is detected, in the fluctuating process described above, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of prefetching suspensions is executed (S321). Therefore, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 performing the prefetching process before the prefetching process is completed, the prefetching pending count is 0 or a negative value. Will be shown. On the other hand, if the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed prior to the prefetching process, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot set the continuous notice effect and the command destruction determination that can be performed by the prefetching. It is not necessary to transmit to the lamp control means 113.

  Therefore, in the process of S776, when the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h indicates 0 or a negative value, the prefetch command is not set, and the process of S777 described later is also skipped. Then, by moving to the processing of S772, it is possible to suppress the prefetch command from being unnecessarily transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, so that there is no waste between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Communication can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to process the result of the prefetching process for the one in which the variation effect has already started, it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from being overloaded with an excessive processing load.

  Whether or not the prefetch pending count stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h indicates 0 or a negative value may be confirmed not only in S776 but also in S773 to S776. Good. Then, when the prefetch pending count indicates 0 or a negative value, the process may be stopped at that stage, and the process may proceed to S777.

  In the subsequent processing of S777, the prefetch execution flag 303d5 of the holding area (prefetch target holding area) corresponding to the number of preread holdings in the prefetch holding number storage area 303h is set to ON, and the counters C1 to C1 stored in the preread target holding area are set. It is shown that the values of C3 and CS1 are pre-read, and the results of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination are predicted (S777). As a result, it is possible to prevent the prefetching from being performed again on the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that have been prefetched.

  After the processing of S777, the processing returns to the processing of S771, and again, among the holding areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the holding ball storage area 303b, the holding areas for which prefetching has not been executed yet are executed. Is extracted (S771), and it is determined whether there is a reserved area for which prefetching has not been executed (S772). Then, in each of the holding areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held, the processing of S773 to S777 is repeatedly executed until there is no holding area for which prefetching has not been executed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the prefetch process (S701) is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 has been described. Similar to the form, in the main process, the prefetch process may be executed within the remaining time until the next timing at which the process executed every 4 milliseconds is to be executed. That is, the prefetch processing may be performed at any timing after the negative determination is made in the processing of S703 of the main processing, through the processing of S704, S705, S702, and then returning to the processing of S703. . By executing the prefetching process within the remaining period, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired in accordance with the detection of the starting winning are stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b in the starting winning process (see FIG. 19). This can be determined earlier in the main process. Therefore, it is possible to predict the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination result by the pre-reading process earlier, so that the actual lottery is first performed based on each counter value of the pre-reading target during the pre-reading process. can do.

  If the prefetch process is not executed every 4 milliseconds and there is no process to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process, the process of S703 of the main process is omitted as in the first embodiment. However, the processes of S701 to S705 may be repeatedly executed. In this case, the concept of the remaining time disappears, but the execution time of the prefetching process changes according to the state of the game, so the timer interrupt process for updating the first per random number counter C1 and the second per random number counter C2 is performed. With respect to the execution interval (4 milliseconds in this embodiment), the time at which the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, even in this case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the variation time. The value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. it can.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 at the time when the start winning is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b. In the main process (see FIG. 24), the prefetch process is executed regardless of the time interval in which the timer interrupt process is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of the execution of the variation effect is one of the timer interrupt processing executed prior to the main processing, which is the variation start processing (see FIG. 21). ) Inside.

  Here, like a conventional pachinko machine, at the start of the variation effect, the pre-reading is performed by using the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are held by the starting prize detected after the starting prize corresponding to the variation effect. If it is processed, the jackpot lottery at the start of execution of the variable effect is performed, and if the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the look-ahead at the time of winning the start is predicted, the game is played as described above. There is a risk that the game will be affected due to a delay in the completion of the jackpot lottery, which is the most important process.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, while the pre-reading process is executed in the main process, the jackpot lottery or the like performed at the start of execution of the variation effect is performed by one process of the timer interrupt process. It is configured to be executed in a certain fluctuation start process (see FIG. 21). As a result, even if the prefetching process is being executed in the main process, the timer interrupt process is executed with priority, so that the jackpot lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect. On the other hand, since the prefetching process is continuously executed after the end of the timer interrupt process, the prefetching process can be surely completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the prefetching process is performed by using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired when the start winning to the first entrance 64 is detected. While executing and predicting the result of the big hit lottery or the like, the big hit lottery can be performed without delay at the execution start timing of the variable effect, so that the game can be controlled normally.

  In this pre-reading process, pre-reading is executed for all holding areas for which pre-reading has not been executed among the holding areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in one pre-reading processing. , Predict the results of jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination. As a result, pre-reading can be executed earlier than in the case where pre-reading is performed for any one of the holding areas in one pre-reading process. Therefore, prefetching can be executed for more values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 before the original jackpot lottery or the like is performed.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 303b at the timing of the start winning are directly read from the reserved ball storage area 303b and prefetched, and the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern It is configured to execute a prefetching process for predicting the result of the determination. As a result, the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached during the prefetch processing, and when the shift processing is performed between the respective holding first to fourth areas of the holding sphere storage area 303b, the holding area during the preread processing is shifted. However, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 303 as compared with the case where the prefetch execution areas 203d and 203e are provided as in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment can achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  In the pre-reading process according to the second embodiment, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read for one reserved area in order from the earliest reserved area among the reserved areas where pre-reading has not been executed. Although the case of performing (S773 to S777) has been described, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are prefetched simultaneously and in parallel from all the reserved areas for which prefetching has not been executed, which are extracted by the processing of S771, and S773 to S777. You may make it perform the process equivalent to.

  In this case, in the process of S773, the holding counts of all holding areas for which prefetching has not been executed (readahead holding counts) may be stored in the readahead holding count storage area 303h for each holding area. For example, when prefetching has not been executed for the reserved second area and the reserved third area, the values of “2” and “3” may be stored in the prefetch reserved number storage area 303h.

  Further, in the processing of S777, the prefetch execution flag 303d5 of the holding area may be set to ON for the holding area corresponding to all the prefetch holding times stored in the prefetch holding number storage area 303h. For example, if the values “2” and “3” are stored in the prefetch pending count storage area 303h, the prefetch execution flags 303d5 for the pending second area and the pending third area may be set to ON.

  Further, when a plurality of values are stored in the prefetch reservation number storage area 303h, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in all the reservation areas corresponding to the plurality of values are preread simultaneously in parallel. Good. For example, when the values of “2” and “3” are stored in the prefetch reservation number storage area 303h, the prefetch of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reservation second area and the reservation third area are stored. The pre-reading of the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the memory may be simultaneously performed in parallel.

  In this case, for example, the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 303b1 of the reserved second area and the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 303b1 of the reserved third area. The random number counter C1 and (that is, the first random number counter C1 stored in all the reserved areas for which prefetching has not been executed) are read in advance, and then, the process of reading the winning value of 1 from the ROM 202 and the reading thereof. The process of comparing the winning value with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 of each holding area is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the first winning random number counter C1 of at least one holding area is a big hit. You may do it.

  In addition, the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 303b4 of the holding second area and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 303b4 of the holding third area (that is, prefetch is not performed). A process of previously reading the fluctuation type counters CS1 stored in all the execution holding areas, and then reading the judgment values for judging the fluctuation patterns from the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D. The process of comparing the read determination value with the value of the variation type counter CS1 of each holding area is repeatedly executed until the variation type is determined for at least one holding area variation type counter CS1. You may

  Furthermore, in other prediction prediction by pre-reading, for example, in prediction of jackpot type judgment and prediction of judgment of stop type at the time of deviation, similar to fluctuation pattern determination, pre-reading is performed from all reserved areas that have not been executed. The value of each corresponding counter is read in advance, and then the process of reading the judgment value and the process of comparing the read judgment value with the counter value of each holding area are performed. However, it may be repeatedly executed until the prediction of the determination is completed.

  As a result, it is not necessary to separately read the hit value and the judgment value and predict the big hit lottery and the judgment such as the variation pattern each time the pre-reading is performed for each of the reserved areas that have not been executed yet. It is possible to reduce the number of times the hit value and the judgment value are read, and it is possible to speed up the prefetch process.

  In this case, for example, after it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one holding area is a big hit, only for the first hit random number counter C1 of the remaining holding areas that are not determined to be a big hit. The prediction processing of the jackpot lottery may be continuously executed. Similarly, after the prediction of one judgment is completed for the counter value of at least one reservation area, the judgment of the one judgment is made only for the counter values of the remaining reservation areas for which the prediction of judgment is not completed. The prediction process of 1 may be continuously executed. As a result, the counter value for which the prediction of the big hit lottery or the prediction of the judgment has been completed is not compared with the hit value or the judgment value, so that the waste of the processing can be omitted and the prefetch processing can be further speeded up. You can

  On the other hand, for example, even after it is determined that the first hit random number counter C1 of at least one holding area is a big hit, the first hit random number counters C1 of all the holding areas for which pre-reading has not been executed, The prediction processing of the jackpot lottery may be continuously executed. Similarly, with respect to the counter values of at least one holding area, even after the prediction of the one determination is completed, the counter values of all the holding areas for which the prefetching has not been executed have been determined by the one determination. The prediction process may be continuously executed. Although this may result in waste of processing, there is no need for processing to change the holding area used for prediction by determining whether the jackpot lottery prediction or the judgment prediction has been completed for any of the holding areas. Therefore, the processing can be simplified. Therefore, the increase in the capacity associated with the control program due to the prefetching process can be suppressed to be small.

  Incidentally, the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims, and the "big hit" described in the above embodiments is a "predetermined game" described in the claims. "Value", "variation pattern command" and "stop type command" described in the above embodiment correspond to "production control signal" in the claims, and "main process" described in the above embodiment. Corresponds to the “first processing” described in the claims, the “timer interrupt processing” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “second processing”, and the “main processing” and “timer interrupt processing” The MPU 201 that executes "corresponds to the" first processing means "and the" second processing means "described in the claims, and the" variation pattern "described in the above embodiment is the" variation pattern "described in the claims. "Dynamic display mode of effect". Further, the "holding first to fourth areas" described in the above embodiment correspond to the "storage area" described in the claims, and the "prefetch information 0th to fourth areas" described in the above embodiment are The "determination storage area" described in the claims corresponds to the "prefetch information valid flag" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "valid information storage area" described in the claims.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is that the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, is in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination video RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and from the state of the signal, the resident signal is used. It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends the access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the scanning is during a blank period (scanning on a blank region which is a scanning region other than the display region provided in the third symbol display device 81). MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or by a notification from the image controller 237, and if the scanning state is in the blank period, each of the video RAMs 235, 236 is You may judge that it is unused. Thereby, only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237 is confirmed and it is determined whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Further, in this case, when the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f has transfer data information which is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the MPU 231 follows the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information. The image data may be read out from and the process of transferring to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is predetermined so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. It is required for drawing the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the transfer processing of the image data by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and The transfer process can be executed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but shares the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. By doing so, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed to the image controller 237, but simply by specifying the address, the address can be specified. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply designated. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the bus line 240 to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be provided by connecting. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM may be provided, and the character ROM 234 may be connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or bus line 240 designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the character constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a is used. ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in each of the above embodiments, an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. Can be made.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the main processing is started in the display control device 114, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as “0000H”, it is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The case where the boot program being set is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and is output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then in the ROM controller 234b. When it is detected that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. . In this case, when the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c or is being set. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  In the above embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 may include a small-capacity ROM, and the ROM may store a boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on. In this case, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the built-in ROM in the buffer RAM 234c and then corresponds to the designated address. The data (instruction code) to be executed may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, it sets the boot program stored in the built-in ROM to the buffer RAM 234c, and then the address of the bus line 240 in the ROM controller 234b is " When the designation of "0000H" is detected, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

  In general, since the built-in ROM can shorten the connection wiring, the parasitic capacitance applied to the wiring can be reduced. As a result, the wiring delay caused by signal propagation can be reduced, and the data read time can be shortened. In addition, the built-in ROM can be designed with its data bus width freely according to the individual hardware specifications. Therefore, if the data bus width is set wide, a large amount of data can be read at one time. Is. Therefore, if the boot program is stored in such an internal ROM, the boot program executed first after the power is turned on in the MPU 231 is read out from the internal ROM at high speed and set in the buffer RAM 634c. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the address specified on the bus line 240 can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  Further, instead of storing the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on in the NOR ROM 234d in the character ROM 234 or the built-in ROM of the ROM controller 234b, it is provided outside the character ROM 234 and connected to the bus line 240. A NOR ROM having an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) may store the boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on. In this case, in the NOR type ROM outside the character ROM 234 connected to the bus line 240, the address designated by the MPU 231 on the bus line 240 corresponds to a part of the boot program to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. When the address (for example, “0000H” to “0400H”) is detected, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address is read from the first program storage area 735a and output to the MPU 231. May be. Further, the ROM controller 234b may be configured such that the data output of the character ROM 734 at this time is in a high impedance state.

  Here, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, it is provided outside the character ROM 234 and is connected to the bus line 240 and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes). In addition, by storing a part of the boot program to be executed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, a part of the boot program is read from the NOR ROM at high speed and is output to the MPU 231. be able to. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can immediately fetch the instruction code of the boot program that is read at high speed, the main process can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. Further, in this case, since the NOR type ROM is connected to the bus line 240, the number of parts is increased as compared with the above-described respective embodiments. It is provided to store a part of the program, and as the capacity thereof, an extremely small capacity can be used as described above. Therefore, the increase in cost due to the provision of the NOR ROM can be suppressed.

  In this case, as a memory which is provided outside the character RAM 234 and is connected to the bus line 240 and which stores a boot program to be executed first after the power is turned on, a NOR type ROM is used instead of the NAND type flash memory 234a. Alternatively, a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading can be used. For example, as such a memory, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like may be used.

  Further, after the power is turned on, all the control programs including the boot program to be executed first are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a in the character ROM 234, and the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115. Then, the boot program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a to be executed after power-on is first set in the buffer RAM 234c, and then the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the bus line 240 is designated as "0000H". Then, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240.

  As a result, at the stage where the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231 on the bus line 240, a process of reading a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 234a has been started, or a part of the boot program has already been read. Are set in the buffer RAM 534c. Therefore, if a part of the boot program is already set in the buffer RAM 234c at the stage when the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” on the bus line 240 in response to the system reset release, the character ROM 234 stores the data (command Code) can be immediately read from the buffer RAM 234c. Even when a part of the boot program is not set in the buffer RAM 234c at the stage when the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” on the bus line 240, a part of the boot program is already written from the NAND flash memory 234a. The reading process has started. Therefore, as compared with the case where reading of a part of the boot program from the NAND flash memory 234a is started in response to the designation of the address “0000H” on the bus line 240, the MPU 231 sends the address “0000H” to the bus line 240. ", The time from when the character ROM 234 sets a part of the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the data (instruction code) at the specified address from the buffer RAM 234c to the MPU 231. You can Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. As a result, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 214 composed of the NAND flash memory 214a having a slow reading speed.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b designates it directly from the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read and output to the MPU 181 via the bus line 240. As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and thus the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 634c. As a result, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 181 has been described. However, the first program storage area is provided in the memory configured by the non-volatile storage medium that can read out at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234d1, and the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 234 is provided in the area. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be directly connected to. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the bus line 240 is not directly connected to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 is displayed and controlled. The device 114 can be easily provided.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more Video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is configured by a 1-port type (1 input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-channel type is also possible. A port type RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to perform parallel processing of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drawing process from being delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. Alternatively, the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I / O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately in response to a reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferably resident in the video RAM 235.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is stored in the resident video RAM 235. You may transfer. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by the drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the resident video RAM 235 has been described for the case where the contents are retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. On the basis of a command received from 113, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly changed, the image data made resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when the other resident images are updated, and is retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You can leave it. Also, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly made resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may do it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is displayed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 189 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 189 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power outage is stored, In the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed and the RAM determination is performed before the main image data at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 should not be executed. You may comprise. In this case, the image data may not be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the instantaneous blackout and the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. The image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for restoration from a power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary blackout or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the bus line 240. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the bus line 240 or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the bus line 240, which frequently exchanges data signals, is affected. Transfer can be performed efficiently.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank region which is the scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. In addition, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are switched from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. Although the case of transferring has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is being displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to the 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. The image data corresponding to the main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. . Further, the main image at power-on and the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and are stored in the normal video RAM 236 at the power-on main image and at power-on. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or frame. The case where the rear face image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of super reach are changed based on the button operation command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the rear image and the super reach according to the game state based on the rear image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 and change the rear image and the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change, or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, and the additional data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image may be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, a new sub-area in which the original rear image is stored is newly added to the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the rear image is stored in a different area from the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

  In each of the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110, The main control device 110 may detect a vibration error and the main control device 110 may transmit an error command for notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when the vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 39) by turning on the error occurrence flag and further turning on the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error. When it is determined that the warning image is set, the warning image setting process (see FIG. 41B) may be executed to immediately display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor has a back surface of the game board 213. May be attached to. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the ball from being flown into the ball entrance intentionally due to the flow of the ball being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is generated. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 213 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. When receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control unit 110 or the voice lamp control unit 113 or grasping the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor (that is, the error occurrence flag). Is set to ON and the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error is set to ON), the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is displayed as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that an illegal action is given to the player. Can be deterred.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as the additional data table, the case where the drawing content for additionally displaying the continuous notice effect which is not normally displayed in the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is described, but this is not always the case. The additional data table is not limited to the above, and various additional data tables should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. The drawing content for drawing the effect may be defined. In addition, in the additional data table, the drawing content necessary to add and display an image that is not normally displayed to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from main controller 110. Instead of, or in addition to specifying such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tone in that one effect, and the display in one effect. The drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the displayed image may be preset.

  When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table, an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the additional data table. Corresponding to an address that represents time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed and color information designating the changed color tone of the sprite at that time. It may be prescribed. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing content defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the changed color tone in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified to the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is added. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the data table. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the additional data table, in the additional data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 Is made to correspond to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233g. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233g. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect), additionally displayed effects (for example, continuous notice effect). The case where the additional data table defining the drawing content is set and the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is acquired from each of the data tables has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a base effect ( For example, when the display of the effect additionally displayed for the variable effect (for example, the continuous notice effect) is determined, the additional display is performed for the display data table corresponding to the base effect. Addition of the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the rendered effect to each new display data table It generates, on the basis of the new display data tables, may be acquired drawing content of the image. This makes it possible to easily display an effect that is additionally displayed with respect to the base effect. In addition, for each type of effect that is the base, a display data table that defines the drawing content of only the effect that is the base, and display data that specifies the image content that overlaps the effect that is displayed in addition to the effect that is the base. Since it is not necessary to have a table and the like, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. Further, since the drawing content can be specified only by using the newly created display data table, the process required for specifying the drawing content can be compared with the case where the drawing content is specified from two of the display data table and the additional data table. The load can be reduced.

  If it is decided to hide the effect that is additionally displayed with respect to the base effect, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is to acquire the drawing content of the image. May be.

  In addition, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect) is additionally displayed. If you want to display the effect that is additionally displayed, it is added and displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect. If the drawing content of the effect is specified from the display data table, and if the additionally displayed effect is hidden, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect is discarded and the effect becomes the base effect. It is also possible to specify only the drawing contents of the above from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that defines the rendering content of the additionally displayed effect, so that control over the additional data table becomes unnecessary and the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described, but in addition to that, the additional transfer data table which is the transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is prepared. You may. In this additional transfer data table, the sprite that is used in the corresponding additional data table corresponding to the address specified in the additional data table (or the display data table) and at which the transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address Transfer data information of image data may be described.

  In this case, for example, in each of the above embodiments, when the additional transfer data table buffer is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281, and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table becomes Apart from the corresponding transfer data table, the additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list. You may Thereby, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional data table. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional data table. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display control device 114 prepares a transfer data table that defines transfer data information of image data corresponding to the sprite used in the display data table, in accordance with the display data table, and displays a predetermined display. The case where the transfer data table corresponding to the predetermined display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f while the data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. When setting a predetermined display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data information defined by the corresponding transfer data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. New display data It generates Buru, based on the new display data tables, may be acquired and drawing contents and transfer data information of the image simultaneously. Accordingly, since it is possible to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information using the display data table, it is possible to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively. The processing load required for identification can be reduced.

  In addition, when the above-described additional transfer data table, which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table, is prepared, when the predetermined additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the additional data table is added to the additional data table. On the other hand, the transfer data information specified by the corresponding additional transfer data table is added for each address indicating the display time to generate a new additional data table, and based on the new additional data table, the image is displayed. The drawing content and the transfer data information may be acquired at the same time. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In addition, when the display of an effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) that is additionally displayed with respect to a base effect (for example, a variable effect) is determined, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is displayed. On the other hand, the drawing content of the additional data table corresponding to the additionally displayed effect is added for each address indicating the display time, a new display data table is generated, and based on the new display data table. When acquiring the drawing content of an image, the transfer data information defined by the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is added to the display data table for each address indicating the display time. Add the transfer data information specified by the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table for each address indicating the display time. Te, may generate a new display data table. Thus, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content of the effect to be the base, the drawing content of the effect to be added, and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing. It is possible to reduce the processing load required for specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the additional transfer data table, respectively.

  Further, transfer data information may be described in advance in the display data table. Also by this, since it is possible to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information using the display data table, compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information from the display data table and the transfer data table, respectively, The processing load required for the identification can be reduced. In addition, in the display data table, the drawing content of the effect (for example, continuous notice effect) additionally displayed together with the drawing content of the base effect (for example, variable effect) is additionally displayed. When describing in a format that clearly indicates the drawing content of the effect, the display data table is used not only for the transfer data information used in the base effect, but also for the drawing of the effect additionally displayed. The transfer data information of the image is described in a format that clearly indicates that it is the transfer data information of the effect additionally displayed, and it becomes the base when the effect additionally displayed is displayed. The drawing contents and transfer data information of the effect and the drawing contents and transfer data information of the additionally displayed effect are specified from the display data table and added. If the effect shown is hidden, the drawing content of the additionally displayed effect and its transfer data information are discarded, and only the drawing content of the base effect and its transfer data information are displayed in the display data table. May be specified from. Thus, the display data table can be used to specify the drawing content and transfer data information of the base effect, and the drawing content and transfer data information of the effect to be added. Therefore, the display data table and the transfer data table can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are respectively specified from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the game is played. Although we explained the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the person, it is not necessarily limited to this, it can be considered as an effect to display each super reach and it corresponds to each super reach It is also possible to prepare an additional data table to be prepared and set an additional data table corresponding to the super reach selected by the player in the additional data table buffer 233e. Further, the drawing content defined in the additional data table corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display control device 114 describes the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation effect Display data table is prepared for each element such as, "Variation start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Announcement effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and the final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the common pointer 233g is used in the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233g. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame in which the drawing process ends Although described, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231 and also has the image developed first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, The buffer may be alternately selected, and the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and the image information is output to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the finalized display effect is completed, the main controller 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demo command (display demo command) is received, when setting the demo display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect in the display data table buffer 233d. However, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the display ends. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continue to display the finalized display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol including the main symbols to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a rear image which is completely different from the third symbol or the rear image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power source after power-on. After the transfer, the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has been started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variable display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is preferably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on variation image.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the contents of the image to be drawn (drawing contents) at that time and the contents thereof. The case where the information of the image data to be transferred in time (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display content may be specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

  Further, in the display data table or the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. The address of the character ROM 234 may be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image discrimination flag 233j to store whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 437 based on the stored image determination flag 233j. It has been described that the MPU 231 determines whether or not the normal video RAM 236 stores the image data of the predetermined sprite type, and the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image determination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to store whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. You may let me. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if the MPU 231 needs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 236 regardless of the storage state of the image data. Alternatively, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” of the plurality of rear images is made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, but the present invention is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some or all of the super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the transfer data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233g, and the MPU 231 is instructed by the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is necessary at the head of the display data table in the display data table. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. It may be. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally output from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back surface C which is the rear image of the “island stage”, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Is also good. Further, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes in color tone over time, and instead of such a back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is used. It may move or change in size or shape.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the third symbol display device 81 on the pachinko machine 10. By providing a different fourth symbol display device, together with the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device, the continuous notice effect is executed. Good. In this case, the display control device 114 may control the fourth symbol display device or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by providing an accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 may control the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output a sound for the continuous notice effect, so that the continuous notice effect may be executed. The continuous notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. The player can have a big hit expectation by playing a sound, outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination portions 29 to 33. Further, the player usually looks at the third symbol display device 81 in which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the effect different from the normal effect is given to the player. It can be easily recognized. Further, the continuous notice effect can be easily continued by simple control such as the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. A notice production can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is continuously operated by causing the main control device 110 to perform the win / no determination at the start of the variation and the lottery process at the start of the variation, causing the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous announcement effect, and causing the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When the notice production is performed, each control device can share each process. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226. At least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination portions 29 to 33 may be combined, and the continuous notice effects may be executed by interlocking and controlling each. As a result, it is possible to execute more various continuous announcement effects. In addition, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. , Or a combination thereof, by preparing a plurality of continuous notice production modes selected according to the game state (15R certainty variation jackpot, 2R certainty variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, out) after the end of the consecutive notice production Good.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the continuous announcement effect is performed, the case where the image for the continuous announcement effect different from the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but it is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as the stop symbol displayed when the variable effect is finished. In this case, in the continuous notice command process (see FIG. 37A) of the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on, and other The stop symbol determination flag may be set to off. In the command determination processing, since the continuous notice command processing is executed after the stop identification command processing, the chance pattern is set as the stop design instead of the stop design set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the opportunity opportunity can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as a stop symbol for each variation effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a jackpot will be finally obtained.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 110 pre-reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 and predicts the result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination, and then the information about the number of pre-reading pending and the jackpot lottery prediction result. The case has been described in which the pre-reading command including the information about the variation pattern determination result and the information about the prediction result of the variation pattern determination is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, but the present disclosure is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination, or in place of at least one of the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination, other determination, for example, to predict the result of the stop type determination, at least information about the number of prefetch pending and A look-ahead command including information about the prediction result may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be set based on the information regarding the prediction result included in the prefetch command. In addition, the prediction result included in the prefetch command is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and each time the variation pattern command is received, the prefetch information is shifted between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b, and the prefetch information is read. It is determined whether or not the prediction result by the pre-reading stored in the information 0th area matches the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command, and the command destruction determination is performed. Good. As described above, by appropriately setting the prediction result included in the prefetch command, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform various controls based on the prefetch.

  Further, main controller 110 may include the information regarding the number of times of pre-reading preliminarily and include the values pre-read in counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the pre-reading command as they are and transmit them to voice lamp controller 113. Further, the type of counter included in the prefetch pending command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 or may include other counters. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores various tables used in the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination of the main control device 110 in the ROM 222, and when the prefetch command is received, based on the various tables, the jackpot lottery selection is performed. The result or the result of the variation pattern determination may be predicted. Then, based on the prediction result, execution of the continuous announcement effect may be set. In addition, the prediction result is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, and every time a variation pattern command is received, the prefetch information 0th area is shifted while performing a shift process between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b. The command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the prediction result obtained by the pre-reading stored in the [1] matches the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the pre-reading pending command are stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223b as they are, and each time the variation pattern command is received, the pre-reading information Nos. 0 to 4 areas of the pre-reading information storage area 223b are stored. The result of the jackpot lottery and the result of the fluctuation pattern determination may be predicted from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information 0th area while performing the shift process between. Then, the command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the prediction result matches the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the stop type command. By including the values of various counters in the look-ahead command, the voice lamp controller 113 can predict the results of various determinations performed by the main controller 110 from the values of those counters, and the voice lamp controller 113 On the other hand, the degree of freedom of control based on prefetching can be increased.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the continuous warning command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the continuous warning image type indicated by the continuous warning command is displayed in the display control device 114. The case where the transfer instruction is given so as to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the continuous notification image type indicated by the continuous notification command constitutes a continuous notification effect of the same effect type. In this case, after the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command is once transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it is not overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is finished. May be controlled as follows. This makes it possible to prevent the same image data from being repeatedly transferred.

  If the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command constitutes a step-up type continuous notice effect, not only the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type indicated by the continuous notice command but also the step It may be a transfer instruction to transfer the image data corresponding to all the continuous notice image types used in the up-type continuous notice effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Also in this case, the image data corresponding to these continuous notice image types once transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is controlled so as not to be overwritten by other image data until the continuous notice effect is finished. Good. As a result, before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. In addition, it is possible to prevent repeated transfer of the same image data.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the continuous announcement determination process (S1017) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 29), and the continuous announcement effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, in response to the reception of this command, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Good. As a result, it is possible to start the transfer of the image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the variation effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is started. Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used in the continuous announcement effect in a sub area dedicated to the continuous announcement effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data used in the continuous announcement effect can be prevented from being overwritten by other image data, so that the image data corresponding to the desired continuous announcement image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The probability can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous announcement effect from being repeatedly transferred.

  In addition, the continuous notice command transmitted from the display control device 114 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect in which the variable effect is set. As a result, the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous announcement effect is the last, and so long as the continuous announcement effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used in the continuous announcement effect. When the control is performed so that the image data is not overwritten, the overwriting control can be easily canceled.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the execution of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous advance notice image type by the continuous advance notice command has been described. It may be included in the pattern command. That is, in the variable display process (see FIG. 30) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, when the display variation pattern command is generated (S1106), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is performed, When the notice production is performed, information regarding the execution and the continuous notice image type may be included in the display variation pattern command. Then, in the display control device 114, when the received variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous notice image and the continuous notice image type, from the character ROM 234 of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type. A transfer instruction to the normal video RAM 236 is performed, an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice image type is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is displayed. The contents of the additional data table may be added to the data table, a new display data table may be generated and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Alternatively, when additional display information for a plurality of continuous notice image types is described in advance in the display data table for change, a change pattern command for display including information on execution of continuous notice effect and continuous notice image types is received. Then, by setting the additional data flag corresponding to the continuous notice image type to ON, the additional drawing corresponding to the continuous notice image type is displayed from the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The contents may be specified. As a result, the number of commands is reduced, so that the processing can be simplified.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the display variation pattern command includes information regarding the execution of the continuous announcement effect and the continuous announcement image type, the display data table that does not correspond to the continuous announcement image for each variation pattern and each continuous A display data table corresponding to each notice image type is prepared, and the display control device 114 displays the corresponding display data table according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command and the continuous notice image type. It may be set to 233d. That is, the display data table may include one that includes both the drawing content corresponding to one variation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to one continuous notice image type. In this case, it is not necessary to set the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type. Therefore, the number of data tables to be set can be reduced, and the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the instruction to transfer the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be issued in response to the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, one transfer data table needs to be prepared for each variation pattern, so that an increase in the data table can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the stop symbol of the variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is a voice lamp control based on the stop symbol (rear out of front / rear, reach other than out of front / rear, completely out of reach) defined by the main controller 110. Although the case of being set by the device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous notice effect is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, the stop pattern of the last variable effect that has been suspended is stopped. If is not a jackpot, the stop design of the last variation effect may be set not by the stop design determined by the main control device 110 but by a stop design in the out-of-front / rear reach mode. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variable effect in which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol determined by the main control device 110 but is always the front / rear reach, so that the player has a high expectation. be able to.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the case of performing the continuous announcement effect together with all the pending variable effects, each variable effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each fluctuation. In this case, the effect mode of the variable effect other than the last pending variable effect may be changed to the outlying variable effect. Further, by the process of generating the display variation pattern command in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1106 in FIG. 30), the variation pattern is changed according to the setting status of the continuous announcement effect and the number of times of execution of the continuous announcement effect. May be. In addition, when the stop design after the fluctuating effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the fluctuating effect is not updated, and the effect mode of the fluctuating effect is displayed as it is, based on the fluctuating pattern determined by the main control device 110. May be. Here, even if the continuous notice production is continuously performed, even if the corresponding variation production mode is, for example, super reach variation production, if the situation in which the big hit does not appear as a result continues, the player's expectation May be moved backwards, but the continuous announcement effect is continuously performed, and the variation effects other than the variation effect that is finally executed are continuously performed by the outlying variation effect, so that it is finally executed. It is possible to give the player a higher sense of expectation for the variation effect.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the case where the continuous announcement effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the embodiment is not necessarily limited to this and, for example, In the situation where the execution of the notice effect has been decided, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot visually recognize them when performing the variable effect is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the game board 13 is provided with one first entrance 64 for starting a big hit lottery when entering a ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances where the balls are independently detected and the jackpot lottery is started may be provided in the game board 13. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each of the first entrances indicates which of the first entrances is the hold. Information may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entered indicated by the reserved ball number command. When the number of holding balls for the mouth is set to the number of holding balls and the fluctuation pattern command is received, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

  Further, when a plurality of first entrances are arranged on the game board 13, prefetching may be executed for the counter values held at the respective first entrances. In this case, the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 may include information indicating which of the first entrance openings is the prefetch for the hold. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating the fluctuation effect held by any of the first entrances. Good. Furthermore, in the voice lamp control device 113, a prefetch information storage area may be prepared for each first entrance. As a result, every time the variation pattern command is received, the shift process is performed on the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the first entrance for which the starting winning that has triggered the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command is detected. By doing so, it is possible to easily determine the correspondence relationship between the variation effect and the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or variation pattern determination predicted by the look-ahead for the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine the destruction of the command.

  In addition, when a plurality of first entrances are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 determines to start the continuous notice effect when the prefetch command is received, and then the sound lamp controller 113 selects the first entrance where the start winning is made. Regardless, the continuous notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) that are held at that time. Further, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and the variable effect for the prize for one first entrance is executed with priority over the variable effect for the prize for another first entrance. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only from the look-ahead result of the counter value acquired for the winning in the first entrance for which the variable effect is preferentially executed. . As a result, it is not judged whether or not the setting of execution of the continuous dry production is set for the variable production corresponding to the winning of the first entrance having a low priority, and the continuous notice production is not started for this variable production. . If the continuous announcement effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning in the first entrance having a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended in the first entrance having a high priority, There is a possibility that a situation in which the continuous announcement production does not finish easily occurs. On the other hand, in the present modification, it is not determined whether or not the setting of execution of the continuous dry production is set for the variation effect corresponding to the winning of the first entrance having a low priority. Since the continuous notice production is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and decrements the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 30) has been described. , But not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation process (see FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command being set by the variation start process (S311). The value (N) of the counter 203a (see S305 in FIG. 20) is set so that the main controller 110 transmits it to the voice lamp controller 113, and the hold ball number command is set, and the hold ball number command changes pattern. The command may be transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of holding balls held in the main control device 110. In this case, S1108 of FIG. 30 is omitted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the prefetch command is received, the prefetch command is notified after grasping the number of variable effects that have been suspended from the prefetch suspension count included in the prefetch command. From the prediction results of the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern determination performed, the case of deciding whether or not to perform the continuous notice production for all the variation productions previously held has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. When the start of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each of the individual variable effects held further. As a result, the continuous announcement effect may or may not appear for each variation effect, so that it is possible to give the player an expectation for the appearance of the continuous announcement effect, and perform an effect that does not make the player tired. You can In this case, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated each time the variable display process (see FIG. 30) is executed, and a counter is provided to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect in each variable effect. May be. Then, in the variable display process, when the continuous announcement effect is performed (S1110: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous announcement command may be set (S1111). Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined values of the counter that sets the continuous announcement effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the condition. This condition is, for example, the value of the number of times of pre-reading hold included in the pre-reading command when determining whether to start the continuous notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous notice effect, or whether to start the continuous notice effect. The prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command when determining whether or not, the variation pattern of each variation production in which the continuous dry production is executed, or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in each variation effect is changed according to the condition, so that the player can be made aware of the appearance ratio of the continuous announcement effect in each variation effect. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set based on the prefetch command, or the prediction result of the jackpot lottery or the variation pattern determination indicated by the prefetch command is displayed. Each time the variable pattern command is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b, the shift processing described above is executed between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b, and the prefetch information 0th area is also executed. The case has been described where various controls such as command destruction determination are executed based on various prediction results by pre-reading stored in. On the other hand, part or all of the various controls based on the pre-reading may be performed by the display control device 114 instead of the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prefetch command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display prefetch command including some or all of the information included in the prefetch command, and transmits it to the display control device 114. Good. Further, main controller 110 may directly transmit the prefetch command to display controller 114. The prefetch command or the display prefetch command transmitted to the display control device 114 may include various counter values instead of the prediction results of various determinations.

  On the other hand, in the display control device 114, based on the information included in the read-ahead command or the display-use read-ahead command, the number of change effects that has been held first is grasped based on the number of read-ahead reservations, and the jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination are predicted. From the result, it may be determined whether or not the continuous notice presentation is performed for all the variation presentations that are previously held. When the prefetch command or the display prefetch command includes various counter values, a table used for jackpot lottery and various determinations in the main control device 110 is stored in the ROM or the like of the display control device 114, and then the display control device. At 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command. Then, when performing the continuous announcement effect, the display control device 114 may determine the mode of the continuous announcement effect. Here, when the mode of the continuous notice effect is determined, the transfer data information may be included in the drawing list so that the image data of the continuous notice effect of the mode is stored in the normal video RAM 236. After that, each time the display variation pattern command is received, the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice effect of the set mode is added so that the continuous notice effect is performed for the variation effect for the number of prefetches. It may be set in the buffer 233e.

  Further, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with an equivalent to the prefetch information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9), and when a prefetch command or a display prefetch command is received, the prefetch information provided in the prefetch information storage area is received. Of the information first to fourth areas, various prediction results such as the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination or various counter values included in the prefetch command may be stored in an area corresponding to the number of times the prefetch command is reserved. Then, every time the display variation pattern command is received, a shift process similar to the shift process performed by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas, and the prefetch information 0th area. Various controls may be executed according to various prediction results or various counter values based on the prefetch stored in the. For example, various prediction results based on pre-reading stored in the pre-reading information No. 0 area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination predicted from various counter values based on pre-reading stored in the pre-reading information No. 0 area. The command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether the variation pattern indicated by the received display variation pattern command or the stop type indicated by the received display variation type command matches. When the prefetch command or the display prefetch command includes various counter values, a table used for jackpot lottery and various determinations in the main control device 110 is stored in the ROM or the like of the display control device 114, and then the display control device. At 114, the results of the jackpot lottery and various determinations may be predicted from various counter values included in the prefetch command or the display prefetch command.

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113, and the voice lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. The command may be directly transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device a command instructing output of each voice and lighting of the lamp. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as a single control device, when the prefetch command is received by the single control device, the continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the information included in the prefetch command. You may set it. Further, a RAM corresponding to the read-ahead information storage area 223b (see FIG. 9) is provided in the RAM of the one control device, and when a read-ahead command is received, the read-ahead information items 1 to 1 provided in the read-ahead information storage area are stored. In the area corresponding to the number of times of prefetching of the prefetch command in the fourth area, various prediction results or various counter values such as the jackpot lottery and variation pattern determination included in the prefetch command may be stored. Then, each time a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the same shift processing as in the above embodiments is executed between the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas, and the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information 0th area is executed. Various controls may be executed according to various prediction results or various counter values based on. For example, various prediction results based on pre-reading stored in the pre-reading information No. 0 area, or prediction results such as jackpot lottery and fluctuation pattern determination predicted from various counter values based on pre-reading stored in the pre-reading information No. 0 area. The command destruction determination may be performed by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command and the stop type indicated by the received stop type command match.

  Further, when the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of a command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as a continuous notice command or an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, Various flags such as a continuous notice flag and an error occurrence flag are generated, and the display data table, the transfer data table, and the additional data table are displayed on the basis of the flags, the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table buffer 233f, and the additional data table buffer 233e. It may be set in the composite data table buffer 451d, various image data such as a warning image may be generated, or a transfer instruction of necessary image data may be set.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning of the first entrance 64 and the passage of the second entrance 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball entrance 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed along the predetermined direction such as the vertical direction or the L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms and displays the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some of them are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

  Main control means for performing the main control of the game, sub-control means for performing control based on the control signal from the main control means, and variation control accompanying the dynamic display of the identification information is performed by the control of the sub-control means. In the gaming machine, which is provided with a predetermined playing value, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect performed by the displaying means, the main control is performed. The means is a predetermined number of detecting means for detecting the satisfaction of the starting condition and starting information acquired with the satisfaction of the starting condition detected by the detecting means until the lottery based on the starting information is performed. And a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means when starting the variation effect on the display means, and a storage means for storing the lottery. Generation means for generating an effect control signal based on the lottery result by the stage, first output means for outputting the effect control signal generated by the generating means to the sub control means, and effect control signal by the first output means Before the output, the determination means for determining the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal based on the starting information used for the lottery, and the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means A second output means for outputting to the sub-control means, the sub-control means controlling the display means to perform a variable effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means, Various controls are executed based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means, and the main control means repeatedly executes the first processing after the power is turned on. And a second processing means for executing the second processing periodically at a predetermined time interval prior to the first processing by interruption, and the determination means determines the lottery content according to the above. The gaming machine A1 is performed in the first processing executed by the first processing means, and the lottery is performed in the second processing executed by the second processing means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the main control means detects that the start condition is satisfied by the detection means, the start information acquired along with the satisfaction of the start condition is until the lottery based on the start information is performed. During this period, the predetermined number is stored as an upper limit in the storage means. Then, when the variation effect is started by the display means, the lottery means performs the lottery based on the one start information acquired first and stored in the storage means, and the effect control signal is generated based on the lottery result. The production control signal generated by the generation unit is output to the sub-control unit by the first output unit. Further, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is determined by the determination means based on the starting information used for the lottery, Information regarding the determination of the lottery content is output to the sub-control unit by the second output unit. The sub-control means controls the display means so as to perform the variable effect based on the effect control signal output from the first output means, and various controls based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. To execute. Here, the main control means includes a first processing means that repeatedly executes the first processing after the power is turned on, and a first processing means that executes the second processing periodically at a predetermined time interval by prioritizing the first processing by an interrupt. Two processing means are provided, and the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is performed in the first processing executed by the first processing means, and the lottery by the lottery means is executed by the second processing means. It is configured to be performed in the second process. Thereby, even if the determination of the lottery content used to generate one effect control signal is being performed in the first process, the second process takes precedence over the first process after the predetermined time has elapsed. In the second process, which is executed by interruption, a lottery for generating another effect control signal can be performed when the change effect is started by the display means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the lottery for displaying the variation effect on the display means, which may be a chance to give a predetermined game value to the player, is delayed due to the determination of the lottery content. On the other hand, since the determination of the lottery content is performed again in the first processing after the completion of the second processing, another production control signal is generated during the determination of the lottery content used to generate one production control signal. Even if the lottery is performed, the determination of the lottery content can be completed without any problem. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of normally performing the main control of the game while determining the lottery contents and realizing various controls.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the main control means outputs information relating to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means, the main control means uses the lottery means based on the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. The number-of-waits acquisition unit that acquires the number of waits until the lottery is performed is provided, and the second output unit, together with the information on the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit, displays the number of standbys acquired by the number-of-waits acquisition unit. A gaming machine A2, which outputs to the sub control means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1. That is, in the case where the main control means outputs the information related to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means, the number of waiting times before the lottery means performs the lottery based on the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content However, the standby count acquired by the standby count acquisition means and the standby count acquired by the standby count acquisition means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means by the second output means. Thereby, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed based on the starting information for which the determination of the lottery content is made, and the number of waiting times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is also set. Various controls can be executed in consideration. Therefore, the sub-control unit can perform more versatile control.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the main control means uses the reliability determination means for determining whether or not the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low, and the reliability determination means for the reliability control means. A gaming machine A3, comprising: notifying means for notifying the sub control means when the reliability of the result of the lottery content determined by the determination means is determined to be low.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the main control means, the reliability determination means determines that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low. Then, the notification means notifies the sub-control means to that effect, and after receiving the notification, the sub-control means performs various controls based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content with low reliability. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the various controls from being frequently performed based on the wrong determination of the lottery content, so that the player can be provided with more reliable control.

  In the gaming machine A3, the reliability determination means determines the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means when the lottery probability with which a predetermined result set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed. Gaming machine A4 characterized by determining that the reliability of the game is low.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3, when the lottery probability that a predetermined result set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed, the reliability determination means makes a determination before. Since the reliability of the result of the lottery content determined by the means is determined to be low, even if the determination means cannot correctly determine that the lottery probability set for the lottery by the lottery means is changed, It is possible to prevent various controls from being frequently performed based on the determination of the lottery content. Therefore, the player can be provided with more reliable control.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the judging means judges that the reliability is low when the reliability judging means judges that the result of the lottery content previously judged by the judging means is low in reliability. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the result of the drawn lottery content is judged again.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the judging means judges that the reliability of the lottery content previously judged by the judging means is low in reliability. Is configured to judge again the result of the lottery content judged to have low reliability, so that the sub-control means uses more judgment results of the lottery content to execute more diverse control. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the determination means, as the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal, outputs the effect before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. Characterized in that the lottery content of whether to give a predetermined game value to the player after the variable effect performed based on the control signal is stopped and displayed is determined based on the starting information used in the lottery. Playing machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effect is achieved. That is, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, after the variable production performed based on the production control signal is stopped and displayed as the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the production control signal. The content of the lottery on whether to give a predetermined game value to the player is determined by the determination means based on the starting information used in the lottery. Thus, the sub-control means can execute various controls in consideration of whether or not a predetermined game value is given after the variation effect is displayed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, the sub-control unit can perform more versatile control.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the determination means, as the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal, outputs the effect before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A gaming machine A7, characterized in that the lottery content regarding the dynamic display mode of the variation effect performed based on the control signal is determined based on the starting information used in the lottery.

  According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the following effect is achieved. That is, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, as a lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the production control signal, the dynamic display mode of the variable production performed based on the production control signal. The lottery content is determined by the determination means based on the starting information used in the lottery. Thereby, the sub-control means can execute various controls in consideration of the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal output later. Therefore, the sub-control unit can perform more versatile control.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the sub-control means is based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means, and a part until the variation effect is performed. Alternatively, the gaming machine A8 is provided with an effect setting means for setting the same or related effects for all the variable effects.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the sub-control means, based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means, for a part or all of the variation effect until the variation effect for which the determination is performed, The same or related effects are set by the effect setting means. Thereby, when the same or related effect is performed over a plurality of variable effects, the player can be informed of the lottery content performed for the variable effect performed after the effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that some game value will be added.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the sub-control means is based on the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means and the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content, the lottery means. According to the appropriate determination means for determining whether or not the content of the effect control signal generated by the generation means based on the result of the random selection is generated by the generation means and output from the first output means, and the appropriate determination. When it is determined by the means that the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the content of the effect control signal do not correspond to each other, the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal is special. A gaming machine 9 characterized by comprising a mode changing means for changing the mode.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the sub-control means performs the lottery by the lottery means based on the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means and the start information used for the determination of the lottery content, and based on the lottery result. The appropriate determination means determines whether or not the content of the effect control signal generated by the generation means and output from the first output means is appropriate. Then, when it is determined that they are not appropriate, the dynamic display mode of the variable effect performed based on the effect control signal is changed to a special mode by the mode changing means. Here, the lottery means performs the lottery based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content, and the content of the effect control signal generated by the generating means based on the lottery result. If and are not appropriate, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit cannot correctly receive various signals from the main control unit. In such a state, if the fluctuating effect is performed according to the effect control signal, the fluctuating effect may give the player a game result different from the expectation that the player has, and as a result, the player may be given a result. May cause distrust. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in such a case, the variation effect is performed in a special mode, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having an expectation different from the actual lottery result, and thus the game can be suppressed. The player can continue playing the game without anxiety.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control means stores, separately from the storage means, the start information that is acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied. The determination means uses the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal for the lottery before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is determined based on the starting information stored in the second storage means as the starting information.

  The gaming machine B1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A1 to A9. That is, in the main control means, the starting information acquired when the starting condition detected by the detecting means is satisfied and stored in the storage means is stored in the second storage means separately from the storage means. Then, the determination means stores the content of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal in the second storage means as the start information used for the lottery before the production control signal is output by the first output means. It is configured to make a determination based on the performed start information. Thus, even if the storage state of the one or more start information stored in the storage means is changed based on the lottery performed by the lottery means, for example, one or more of the storage means in the storage means is associated with the lottery by the lottery means. Even when the storage area for the start information is changed, the determination means can determine the lottery content using the start information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the lottery for generating another effect control signal is performed while the lottery content used to generate one effect control signal is being determined, the starting information used to determine the lottery content can be easily read. .

  In the gaming machine B1, the main control means is a second storage state instructing means for indicating whether or not the second storage means stores start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. And when the start information stored in the storage means is stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied in the second storage means, the second storage state instruction means And a state setting means for setting the stored state of the starting information in the second storage means to the state in which the starting information whose determination of the lottery content by the determination means has not been completed is stored. The storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is a state in which the start information is stored in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. In this case, based on the starting information stored in the second storage means, before the effect control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is displayed. A gaming machine B2 characterized by being judged.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the main control means, the second storage state instructing means indicates whether or not the second storage means stores the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. Further, when the starting information stored in the storage means that is acquired when the starting condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is stored in the second storage means, the state setting means causes the second storage state instructing means to store the start information. The storage state of the starting information in the second storage means indicated by the above is set to a state in which the starting information whose determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored. When the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is the state in which the start information whose determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, Based on the starting information stored in the second storage means, the determination means determines the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the production control signal before the production control signal is output by the first output means. It As a result, when the starting information is stored in the second storage means, the determination means determines that the storage state in the second storage means is such that the determination information by the determination means has not been completed and the startup information is stored. It is possible to easily determine that there is something, and surely start the determination of the lottery content based on the start information that the determination of the lottery content is incomplete.

  In the gaming machine B2, the main control means is such that the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means indicates that the determination means has not yet completed the determination of the lottery content. Is stored, the start information newly acquired upon the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means is not stored in the second storage means. A gaming machine B3 comprising a second storage control means.

  According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is such that the start information is stored in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. In some cases, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means by the second storage control means. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the start information, which has already been stored in the second storage means and whose determination of the lottery content is not completed, from being overwritten by the newly acquired start information. In particular, since it is possible to suppress overwriting by newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being erroneously made.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the main control means also stores, in the second storage means, the start information that is acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied and is stored in the storage means. In the case of performing the lottery by the lottery means for storing the number of times of waiting until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the start information stored in the storage means, and the lottery by the lottery means is performed, The number-of-waits subtraction means for subtracting one from the number-of-waits stored in the number-of-waits storage means, and the information regarding the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the starting information stored in the second storage means. A standby count acquisition unit for acquiring the standby count stored in the standby count storage unit when outputting to the sub-control unit, and the second output unit includes a lottery by the determination unit. Gaming machine B4, characterized by outputting the standby number acquired by the standby number obtaining unit along with information about the determination of volume to the secondary control unit.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the main control means also stores the start information, which is acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and is stored in the storage means, in the second storage means, the start information stored in the storage means. The number of times of waiting until the lottery is performed based on the information is stored in the number-of-waiting storage means. When the lottery means performs the lottery, the standby count subtraction means subtracts 1 from the standby count stored in the standby count storage means. As a result, the lottery means performs the lottery, and the fact that the number of waiting times is reduced by 1 is accurately reflected. Therefore, the start-up information stored in the storage means is the same as the start-up information stored in the second storage means. It is possible to always accurately store the number of times of waiting until the lottery is performed based on the number of times of waiting in the number-of-waiting storage means. Then, when the information regarding the determination of the lottery content performed by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means is output to the sub-control means, the number of wait times stored in the standby number storage means is the number of wait times. The second output means is configured to output to the sub-control means the number of waits acquired by the number-of-waits acquisition means, together with the information related to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Accordingly, even when the lottery content is determined based on the starting information stored in the second storage means, the sub-control means stores the information together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content. It is possible to accurately notify the number of waiting times before the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the same start-up information as the start-up information used for judging the lottery content among the start-up information stored in the means. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed on the basis of the start information by which the determination of the lottery content is performed, and the number of waiting times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub control means can perform more precise control.

  In the gaming machine B4, the main control means includes a standby number determination means for determining whether or not the standby number stored in the standby number storage means is 0 or less, and the second output means uses the standby number determination means to determine the standby number. When it is determined that the number of waits stored in the number-of-waits storage means is 0 or less, the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is not output to the sub-control means. .

  According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the standby frequency determination means determines whether the standby frequency stored in the standby frequency storage means is 0 or less. The fact that the number of times of waiting stored in the number of waiting times storage means becomes 0 or less is determined by the lottery means based on the same starting information as the starting information stored in the second storage means among the starting information stored in the storage means. This means that the number of waiting times before the lottery is performed is 0 or less, that is, the lottery means performs the lottery based on the start information. Therefore, the standby number determination means determines whether the standby number stored in the standby number storage means is equal to or less than 0, so that among the startup information stored in the storage means, the start information stored in the second storage means It is possible to judge that the lottery has been performed based on the same start information. Here, before the information relating to the determination of the lottery content based on the start information stored in the second storage means is output to the sub-control means, the lottery content is determined from the start information stored in the storage means. If the lottery means performs the lottery based on the same start-up information as the start-up information used and the result of the lottery is output to the sub-control means, it is also meaningful to output the information regarding the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means after that May not do On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B5, the second output means determines the lottery content by the determination means when the standby frequency determination means determines that the standby frequency stored in the standby frequency storage means is 0 or less. It is configured so that the information regarding the judgment is not output to the sub control means. Accordingly, based on the same starting information as the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content, of the starting information stored in the storage means before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means. When the lottery means performs the lottery, the lottery result can be prevented from being unnecessarily output to the sub-control means after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control means stores, separately from the storage means, the start information that is acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied. When the satisfaction of the start condition is detected by the second storage means and the third storage means, and the detection means, the lottery content is determined by the determination means of the second storage means and the third storage means. A storage control unit that stores the start information acquired when the start condition is satisfied is stored in either one of the uncompleted start information that is not stored, and the determination unit is the lottery content by the determination unit. Based on the start information of at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start winning that is incomplete is stored, the effect control signal is output by the first output means. Gaming machine C1 to before being force, characterized in that to determine the drawing contents by said selecting means to be used in generating 該演 output control signal.

  The gaming machine C1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9. That is, in the main control means, the second storage means and the third storage means that store the start information, which is acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied and is stored in the storage means, separately from the storage means. Is provided. When the detection means detects that the starting condition is satisfied, the start winning is not stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. The starting information acquired when the starting conditions are satisfied is stored by the storage control means. Here, since the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is performed in the first process, the second process should be regularly performed at a predetermined time interval in preference to the first process. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is often interrupted along with the execution of the second process. Therefore, it may take time to judge the lottery contents. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when the establishment of the start condition is detected, even if the start winning in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored in the second storage means, Since the newly acquired starting information can be stored in the third storage means, more starting information can be stored in the second storage means or the third storage means. Then, the determination means outputs the effect control signal from the first output means based on the start information of at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means in which the start winning for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed is stored. Before being played, the contents of the lottery by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal are determined. Therefore, the lottery content is determined with respect to a larger amount of starting information, so that the sub-control unit can execute more various controls.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the determination means stores the starting winning for which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete, both the second storage means and the third storage means are stored. For each of the starting information stored in the starting information stored in the second storage means and the starting information stored in the starting information stored in the third storage means, based on the starting information, the first A gaming machine C2, which judges the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal before the output means outputs the effect control signal.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, in the case where the starting prize which is incomplete judgment of the lottery content by the judging means is stored in both the second storing means and the third storing means, the starting information stored in the second storing means is stored. For each of the stored starting information and the starting information stored in the starting information stored in the third storage means, based on the starting information, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, The determination means determines the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal. As a result, if two pieces of start information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed are stored in the second storage means and the third storage means, the determination of the lottery content is made for each of the two start winnings. You can Therefore, the determination of the lottery content can be executed earlier for more start information.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the main control means is in a second storage state indicating whether or not the second storage means stores start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. An instructing means, a third memory state instructing means for indicating whether or not the start information indicating that the determination of the lottery content by the determining means is incomplete is stored in the third storing means, and the second storing means. With respect to the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instructing means, when the start information stored in the storage means is stored when the start condition detected by the detecting means is satisfied. In the second storage state setting means for setting the storage state of the start information in the state in which the determination information by the determination means is incomplete, the second storage state setting means and the third storage means are detected. hand When storing the start information that is acquired when the start condition detected by the above is satisfied and is stored in the storage means, the storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state instruction means And a third state setting means for setting the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, and the determination means comprises the second storage state instruction means and the third storage state instruction means. Based on the state indicated by the three storage state instruction means, the storage state of the start information in at least one of the second storage means and the third storage means is the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete. In the case of the stored state, before the production control signal is output by the first output means based on the start information that the determination of the lottery content is incomplete, Gaming machine C3, characterized in that is to determine lottery contents by said selecting means to be used in generating output control signals.

  The gaming machine C3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2. That is, in the main control means, the second storage state instructing means indicates the state of whether or not the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored in the second storage means, and the determination means determines. The state of whether or not the start information for which the determination of the lottery content is incomplete is stored in the third storage means is indicated by the third storage state instruction means. Further, when storing the start information, which is acquired in association with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and stored in the storage means, in the second storage means, the second storage state instruction means indicates the second information. The storage state of the start information in the storage means is set by the second storage state setting means to a state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored. Further, when storing the starting information, which is acquired in association with the establishment of the starting condition detected by the detecting unit and stored in the storing unit, in the third storing unit, the third storage state indicating unit indicates the third information. The storage state of the start information in the storage means is set by the third storage state setting means to a state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored. Then, based on the states indicated by the second storage state instructing means and the third storage state instructing means, the storing state of the starting information in at least one of the second storing means and the third storing means determines the lottery content by the determining means. When the starting information indicating that the lottery is incomplete is stored, the determination means outputs the effect control signal by the first output means based on the starting information indicating that the determination of the lottery content is incomplete. Previously, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined. As a result, when the start information is stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the determination means indicates that the storage state in the second storage means or the third storage means indicates that the determination means has not yet completed the determination of the lottery content. It is possible to easily determine that a certain starting information is stored, and surely start the determination of the lottery content based on the starting information whose determination of the lottery content is incomplete.

  In the gaming machine C3, the storage control means indicates that the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means indicates that the determination means has not yet completed the determination of the lottery content. Is stored, the start information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied is not stored in the second storage means, When the storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state instruction means is the state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, The game machine C4 is characterized in that the start information newly acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied and stored in the storage means is not stored in the third storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3. That is, when the storage state of the start information in the second storage means indicated by the second storage state instruction means is the state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, The control unit causes the second storage unit to not store the start information that is newly acquired and stored in the storage unit when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied. Further, if the storage state of the start information in the third storage means indicated by the third storage state instruction means is the state in which the start information in which the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is incomplete is stored, The control unit causes the third storage unit to not store the start information that is newly acquired and stored in the storage unit when the start condition detected by the detection unit is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to prevent the newly acquired starting information from overwriting the starting information for which the determination means already stored in the second storage means or the third storage means has not completed the determination of the lottery content. In particular, since it is possible to suppress overwriting by newly acquired start information during the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to prevent the determination of the lottery content from being erroneously made.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the main control means also stores, in the second storage means, start information that is acquired when the start condition detected by the detection means is satisfied and is stored in the storage means. In this case, the second waiting number storage means for storing the number of waiting times until the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the starting information stored in the storage means, and the starting condition detected by the detecting means is satisfied. In the case where the starting information acquired in accordance with the above and stored in the storage means is also stored in the third storage means, waiting until the lottery is performed based on the starting information stored in the storage means A third waiting number storage means for storing the number of times, and a waiting number stored in the second waiting number storage means and the third waiting number storage means when the lottery is performed. In the case of outputting to the sub-control means information about the number of waiting times subtraction means for subtracting 1 each and information on the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means. , The sub-control for obtaining the number of times of waiting stored in the second number-of-waiting storage means and providing information on the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the third storage means. And a waiting number acquisition unit for acquiring the number of waiting times stored in the third waiting number storage unit when outputting the number to the unit, and the second output unit includes the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that it outputs the number of waits acquired by the number-of-waits acquisition means to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the main control means also stores the start information, which is acquired with the establishment of the start condition detected by the detection means and is stored in the storage means, in the second storage means, the start information stored in the storage means. The number of waiting times until the lottery is performed based on the information is stored in the second waiting number storage means. Further, in the case where the starting information acquired when the starting condition detected by the detecting unit is satisfied and stored in the storing unit is also stored in the third storing unit, the lottery is performed based on the starting information stored in the storing unit. The number of waiting times until the lottery by the means is stored in the third waiting number storage means. When the lottery means performs the lottery, the standby count subtraction means subtracts 1 from the standby count stored in the second standby count storage means and the third standby count storage means. As a result, the lottery means performs the lottery, and the fact that the number of waiting times is reduced by 1 is accurately reflected. Therefore, the start-up information stored in the storage means is stored in the second storage means or the third storage means. The number of waiting times until the lottery means performs the lottery based on the same start information as the information can be always accurately stored in the second waiting number storage means and the third waiting number storage means. Then, when the information on the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means based on the start information stored in the second storage means is output to the sub-control means, the number of standby times stored in the second standby number storage means is When the information on the determination of the lottery content made by the lottery means on the basis of the starting information acquired by the standby count acquisition means and stored in the third storage means is output to the sub-control means, the third standby count storage means is used. The stored waiting times are acquired by the waiting times acquisition means. The second output means is configured to output the number of times of waiting acquired by the number of times of waiting acquisition to the sub-control means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Accordingly, even when the lottery content is determined based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means, the sub-control means is informed of the determination of the lottery content. In addition, it is possible to accurately notify the number of waiting times until the lottery is performed on the basis of the same starting information as the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content among the starting information stored in the storage means. it can. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed on the basis of the start information by which the determination of the lottery content is performed, and the number of waiting times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub control means can perform more precise control.

  In the gaming machine C5, the main control means includes a standby number determination means for determining whether the standby number stored in the second standby number storage means or the third standby number storage means is 0 or less, and the second output means. When the waiting number judging means judges that the number of waiting times stored in the second waiting number storing means is 0 or less, the above-mentioned is performed based on the starting information stored in the second storing means. When the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not output to the sub-control unit and the standby count stored in the third standby count storage unit is determined to be 0 or less, A gaming machine C6, wherein information relating to the determination of the lottery content by the determination means, which is performed based on the starting information stored in the third storage means, is not output to the sub-control means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5. That is, the standby count determination means determines whether the standby count stored in the second standby count storage means or the third standby count storage means is 0 or less. The fact that the number of standby times stored in the second standby frequency storage means or the third standby frequency storage means has become 0 or less is stored in the second storage means or the third storage means in the starting information stored in the storage means. It means that the number of waiting times before the lottery means performs the lottery based on the same start information as the started information, that is, that the lottery means has performed the lottery based on the start information. . Therefore, the standby count determination means determines whether the standby count stored in the second standby count storage means or the third standby count storage means is equal to or less than 0, so that the second standby count of the start information stored in the storage means is determined. It is possible to determine that the lottery means has performed the lottery based on the same start-up information as the start-up information stored in the storage means or the third storage means. Here, of the start information stored in the storage means before the information related to the determination of the lottery content based on the start information stored in the second storage means or the third storage means is output to the sub-control means, If the lottery means performs the lottery based on the same starting information as the start information used to determine the lottery content, and the result of the lottery is output to the sub-control means, then the information regarding the determination of the lottery content is sent to the sub-control means The output may not make sense. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C6, the second output means, the second storage means, when the standby number determination means determines that the standby number stored in the second standby number storage means is 0 or less. When the number of waits stored in the third number-of-waits storage means by the number-of-waits determination means is 0 or less, the information about the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the starting information stored in When it is determined that there is such information, the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means performed based on the starting information stored in the third storage means is not output to the sub-control means. Accordingly, based on the same starting information as the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content, of the starting information stored in the storage means before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means. When the lottery means performs the lottery, the lottery result can be prevented from being unnecessarily output to the sub-control means after the lottery result is output to the sub-control means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the main control means stores, for each starting information stored in the storage means, information indicating a state of whether or not the determination means determines the lottery content. The determination means is configured to determine the lottery content of the determination information among the starting information stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the determination state storage means. There is no starting information, and based on the starting information, before the production control signal is output by the first output means, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the production control signal is determined. A gaming machine D1 characterized by being present.

  The gaming machine D1 has the following effect in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9. That is, in the main control means, information indicating whether or not the determination means has determined the lottery content is stored in the determination state storage means for each start information stored in the storage means. Then, the judging means judges, based on the information stored in the judging state storing means, the starting information in which the judging means has not judged the lottery content among the starting information stored in the storing means, and the starting information On the basis of the above, the lottery content by the lottery means used for generating the effect control signal is determined before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. With this, even if the storage means separate from the storage means is not provided to determine the lottery content, the start information stored in the storage means, which is not used to determine the lottery content, can be easily used. It is possible to specify and judge the lottery content. Therefore, an increase in cost due to an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the judgment means is based on the information stored in the judgment state storage means, and among the starting information stored in the storage means, all the judgment contents of the lottery have not been judged by the judgment means. The start information is determined, and the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined based on each start information before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the determination means determines, based on the information stored in the determination state storage means, all the startup information among the startup information stored in the storage means for which the determination content has not been determined by the determination means. Based on the starting information, the lottery content by the lottery means used to generate the effect control signal is determined before the effect control signal is output by the first output means. Accordingly, if a plurality of pieces of starting information for which the determination of the lottery content has not been completed are stored in the storage means, the lottery content can be determined for each of the plurality of starting winnings. Therefore, the determination of the lottery content can be executed earlier for more start information.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the storage means has a plurality of storage areas provided for each number of waits until the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the storage areas are associated with the storage areas. Starting information for waiting the lottery by the lottery means for the number of waiting times is stored, and the main control means is based on one starting information stored in one storage area of the storage means by the judging means. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that when the lottery content is determined, a standby frequency storage means is stored for storing the standby frequency associated with the one storage area.

  According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the storage means is provided with a plurality of storage areas that are provided for each number of waits until the lottery is performed, and each storage area has the number of wait times associated with the storage area. The starting information for waiting for the lottery is stored. Here, in the main control means, when the determination means determines the lottery content based on the one start information stored in one storage area of the storage means, it is associated with the one storage area. The waiting count is stored in the waiting count storage means. Accordingly, when the lottery content is determined by the determination means, it is possible to easily determine in which storage area the start information stored is used to make the determination based on the standby count stored in the standby count storage means. it can. Therefore, even if the lottery content is determined using the starting information stored in the storage means, the process relating to the determination can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine D3, the main control means is provided with standby number subtraction means for subtracting one from the standby number stored in the standby number storage means when the lottery means performs the lottery. Machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3. That is, when the lottery means performs the lottery in the main control means, the standby count subtraction means subtracts 1 from the standby count stored in the standby count storage means. Here, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means, the storage area in which the start information for determining the lottery contents is stored is also changed to the storage area corresponding to the smaller number of waiting times. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D4, when the lottery means performs the lottery, the standby count stored in the standby count storage means is decremented by 1. Therefore, the lottery is selected according to the standby count stored in the standby count storage means. It is possible to accurately indicate the storage area in which the starting information used for judging the contents is stored. As a result, even if the lottery means performs the lottery during the determination of the lottery content, the start information used for the determination of the lottery content is stored according to the number of waits stored in the standby number storage means. The stored storage area can be easily determined. Therefore, even when the determination of the lottery content is performed using the starting information stored in the storage means, the process relating to the determination can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second output means outputs the standby count stored in the standby count storage means to the sub-control means together with the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means. Gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second output means supplements the information on the determination of the lottery content by the determination means with the standby frequency stored in the standby frequency storage means. Since it is configured to output to the control means, the sub-control means, together with the information on the determination of the lottery content, until the lottery by the lottery means based on the start information used for the determination The number of waits can be accurately notified. Therefore, in the sub-control means, the lottery is actually performed on the basis of the start information by which the determination of the lottery content is performed, and the number of waiting times until the production control signal is generated and output based on the lottery result is accurately determined. Various controls can be executed while grasping. Therefore, the sub control means can perform more precise control.

  In any of the gaming machines D3 to D5, the main control means includes a standby number determination means for determining whether or not the standby number stored in the standby number storage means is 0 or less, and the second output means has the standby state. When the number-of-times determination unit determines that the number of waits stored in the number-of-waits storage unit is 0 or less, the information about the determination of the lottery content by the determination unit is not output to the sub-control unit. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D3 to D5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the standby frequency determination means determines whether the standby frequency stored in the standby frequency storage means is 0 or less. The fact that the number of waiting times stored in the number-of-waiting storage means becomes 0 or less means that the number of waiting times until the lottery means performs the lottery based on the start information used for judging the lottery content becomes 0 or less. That is, it means that the lottery means has performed a lottery based on the start information. Therefore, the waiting number determination means determines whether the number of waiting times stored in the waiting number storage means is 0 or less, so that the lottery means performs the lottery based on the starting information used for the determination of the lottery content. You can judge that. Here, before the information relating to the determination of the lottery content based on the start information stored in the storage means is output to the sub-control means, the lottery means performs the lottery based on the start information and the lottery result If it is output to the control means, it may not make sense to output information related to the determination of the lottery content to the sub-control means after that. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, the second output means determines the lottery content by the determination means when the standby count determination means determines that the standby count stored in the standby count storage means is 0 or less. It is configured so that the information regarding the judgment is not output to the sub control means. As a result, when the lottery means performs the lottery based on the starting information used in the determination before the information regarding the determination of the lottery content by the determination means is output to the sub-control means, the lottery result is After being output to the sub-control unit, it is possible to prevent the result regarding the determination of the lottery content for the lottery from being unnecessarily output to the sub-control unit.

  In any of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, D5, the sub-control means outputs the information on the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means together with the information, and outputs the standby information. A gaming machine E1 comprising a determination information storage means for storing the number of times in association with the number of times.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2, B4, B5, C5, C6, D5, the sub-control means outputs information about the determination of the lottery content output from the second output means. The information is stored in the judgment information storage means in association with the number of times of waiting output that is output together with the information. Various controls can be executed after waiting for the number of times of waiting in accordance with the lottery. As a result, the sub-control means can execute various controls based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the actual result of the lottery.

  In the gaming machine E1, the main control means determines whether or not the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low, and the reliability determination means previously determines the determination means by the determination means. And a notification means for notifying the sub-control means when it is determined that the reliability of the result of the selected lottery content is low, and the sub-control means, when receiving the notification by the notification means, in the judgment information storage means. A gaming machine E2, which is provided with a determination information invalidating means for invalidating all the stored information regarding the determination of the lottery content.

  The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, in the main control means, when the reliability determination means determines that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low, the sub-control means is notified by the notification means. It Then, when the notification by the notification means is received, the sub-control means invalidates all the information regarding the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination information storage means by the determination information invalidation means. Accordingly, the sub-control unit can suppress various controls after receiving the notification, based on the information about the determination of the lottery content with low reliability. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the various controls from being frequently performed based on the wrong determination of the lottery content, so that the player can be provided with more reliable control.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the judgment information storage means has a plurality of judgment storage areas provided for each number of waiting times until the lottery is performed based on the start information used for judging the lottery content. For each judgment storage area, there is a valid information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the information regarding the judgment of the lottery content stored in the judgment storage area is valid. 2 Information about the determination of the lottery content output from the output means is stored in the determination storage area of the determination information storage means corresponding to the number of waiting times output together with the information, and further corresponds to the determination storage area. A gaming machine E3, characterized by further comprising a judgment information storage control means for effectively setting the information in the valid information storage area.

  The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, in the judgment information storage means, a plurality of judgment storage areas provided for each number of waiting times until the lottery is performed based on the start information used for judging the lottery contents, and each judgment storage area. An effective information storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the information regarding the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination storage area is valid. Then, in the sub control means, the judgment information storage control means judges the judgment information storage means corresponding to the number of waiting times, which is output together with the information about the judgment of the lottery content output from the second output means. The information is stored in the storage area, and the information in the valid information storage area corresponding to the determination storage area is set to be valid. Accordingly, when the sub-control means stores the information regarding the lottery content in the determination information storage means, the information regarding the determination of the lottery content and the number of waiting times of the information can be easily associated with each other. Further, the sub-control means can easily determine whether or not information regarding the determination of valid lottery contents is stored in the determination storage area provided for each number of times of standby, based on the information in the valid information storage area. it can. Therefore, when the sub-control unit executes various types of control based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content, it is possible to reduce the load related to the process.

  In the gaming machine E3, the main control means is a reliability determination means for determining whether or not the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low, and the reliability determination means allows the determination means to be performed previously. And a notification means for notifying the sub-control means when the reliability of the result of the lottery content determined by the above is low, and the sub-control means receives the notification by the notification means, and stores the determination information. A gaming machine E4, characterized by further comprising a judgment information invalidating means for invalidating the information of the valid information storing areas corresponding to all the judgment storing areas provided in the means.

  The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3. That is, in the main control means, when the reliability determination means determines that the reliability of the result of the lottery content previously determined by the determination means is low, the sub-control means is notified by the notification means. It When the notification from the notification means is received, the sub-control means sets the information in the valid information storage areas corresponding to all the judgment storage areas provided in the determination information storage means to be invalid by the determination information invalidation means. As a result, all the information regarding the determination of the lottery content stored in the determination information storage means is easily invalidated. With this, the sub-control unit can easily prevent various controls from being performed based on the information regarding the determination of the lottery content with low reliability after receiving the notification. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the various controls from being frequently performed based on the incorrect determination of the lottery content, and thus it is possible to easily provide the player with highly reliable control.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, and E1 to E4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, and E1 to E4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B5, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, and E1 to E4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is known in which various effect images including variation effects are displayed on a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variation effect is an effect that is performed when a start condition such as a game medium such as a game ball winning a prize (start prize) is established in the starting opening, and for example, three or three horizontally or vertically in the effective display area. When a total of 9 symbols and the like displayed in the 3 × 3 square are variably displayed, and when the variability display is stopped, the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position are a predetermined combination. In addition, a predetermined game value such as a big hit is given to the player.
The variable display pattern (variation pattern) of the symbols and the like in the variation production, the type of the symbols and the like that are stopped and displayed, are varied by the display means based on the start information such as various random number values acquired when the start condition is satisfied. It is determined by performing a lottery or the like when starting the production. When the starting condition is satisfied while the variation effect of 1 is being displayed on the display means, the starting information acquired with the satisfaction of the starting condition is temporarily stored in the storage means and is held. The starting information held here is held until the variation effect corresponding to the previously held starting condition is completed. Then, when the variation effect corresponding to the previously held starting information is completed, a lottery or the like is performed based on each held starting information, and the variation pattern of the variation effect, the stop symbol type, etc. are determined to change. Start execution of production. In this way, the variation effect informs the result of the lottery or the like performed when the variation effect is started on the display means, based on the start information acquired when the start condition is satisfied, and gives the player a predetermined game value. By giving a sense of expectation that the game is given, the interest of the game is improved.
On the other hand, in recent years, in order to further improve the enjoyment of the game, the variation effect is started from the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition without waiting for the timing to start the variation effect on the display means. By judging the result of a lottery or the like, a notice effect is displayed on the display means or the like for notifying that there may be a change effect that gives a predetermined game value in the held change effects. Many game machines that control the above have come to be seen (Patent Document 1: Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383).
Now, in addition to the lottery and the like performed when starting the variation effect on the display means, when the game machine is configured to determine the result of the lottery or the like from the starting information that is acquired and withheld with the establishment of the start condition, For example, immediately before a lottery or the like performed when starting the variable effect on the display means, when the result of the lottery or the like is determined from the start information acquired with the establishment of the start condition, the timing at which the variable effect should be started However, there is a problem that the lottery, which is the most important process in the game, is not completed, and the start of the variable effect is delayed, which may affect the game.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and it is possible to normally perform the main control of the game while realizing various controls by judging the contents related to the lottery and the like. An object is to provide a possible game machine.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub-control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub-control means)
203b, 303b Reserved ball storage area (storage means)
203d First prefetch execution area (second storage means)
203d5 Storage area for prefetch pending count (wait count storage means, second wait count storage means)
203e Second prefetch execution area (third storage means)
203e5 Lookahead pending count storage area (wait count storage means, third wait count storage means)
203f First pre-reading processing flag (second storage state instruction means)
203g Second pre-reading processing flag (third storage state instruction means)
223b Prefetch information storage area (judgment information storage means)
303b5 Prefetch execution flag (judgment state storage means)
303h Pre-reading pending count storage area (standby count storage means)
Random number counter per C1 (part of start information)
C2 First hit type counter (part of start information)
C3 Stop pattern selection counter (part of start information)
CS1 fluctuation type counter (part of start information)
S101 (first output means, second output means)
S201 (Detection means)
S206, S210 (second storage control means, storage control means)
S207 (state setting means, second storage state setting means)
S207 (state setting means, third storage state setting means)
S306 to S308 (standby number subtraction means)
S321 (standby number subtraction means)
S401 to S405 (lottery means)
S406, S407 (generation means)
S701 Prefetch processing (determination means)
S754 (Waiting frequency acquisition means)
S759 (Standby number acquisition means)
S776 (Standby number acquisition means)
S1007, S1008 (mode change means)
S1010 (Appropriate judgment means)
S1012 Continuous notice determination process (production setting means)
S1016 (determination information storage control means)
S1105 (Appropriate judgment means)

Claims (2)

The main control means for performing the main control of the game, the sub-control means for operating based on the command transmitted from the main control means, and the image display means for displaying an image based on the control by the sub-control means It was a gaming machine,
The sub-control means is
Image drawing means for drawing an image for one screen to be displayed on the image display means,
First image storage means for storing a plurality of image information used for drawing an image by the image drawing means,
First display specifying means for specifying, from a plurality of display modes, a predetermined display mode for dynamically displaying identification information on the image display means in response to a predetermined command received from the main control means,
First regulation information storage means for storing first regulation information that regulates, for each screen, rendering information indicating information necessary for rendering in each display mode,
First specifying means for specifying the first prescribed information corresponding to the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means;
Update means that is updated every time a predetermined time elapses,
Every time the updating means is updated, drawing instruction information for instructing the image drawing means to draw an image for one screen based on the drawing information for one screen corresponding to the updated updating means. Drawing instruction information generating means for generating
And a measuring means capable of measuring time,
The image drawing means draws an image for one screen using the image information based on the drawing instruction information generated by the drawing instruction information generating means,
The display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed on the image display means is predetermined for each display mode from the start to the end of the dynamic display.
The sub-control means is
If the the required time from the start of the display in a specific and predetermined display mode has elapsed by the first display specifying means, it continues to display, identifying a first prescribed information used for dynamic continuous display of the identification information A second identifying means,
When the command transmitted from the main control means is the predetermined command, the sub-control means that has received the predetermined command executes the dynamic display of the identification information of the time corresponding to the predetermined command in a specific display mode. Is what
There are multiple times corresponding to the predetermined command,
Display of a dynamic continuous display of the identification information , which is continuously displayed when the required time has elapsed, regardless of the required display mode specified by the first display specifying means. The mode is the same display mode in which the identification information repeats a predetermined movement,
The sub-control means is
When the predetermined command is received from the main control means during the dynamic continuous display period of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information that has been executed before the dynamic continuous display of the identification information is confirmed and displayed. Relative to the received predetermined command, a dynamic display control means for starting the dynamic display of the identification information based on the predetermined display mode specified by the first display specifying means on the image display means is provided. And a gaming machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

Images